Mercedes - SL - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a left-handdrive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Owner's Manual RPrinted Owner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital - in the vehicle The Digital Owner's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on the equipment in your vehicle and your multimedia system. You will find informative animations, individual language selection options and an intuitive search function. Printed manual - in the vehicle In addition to the vehicle Owner's Manual, the full multimedia system Supplement is also available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Digital - on the Internet The online version of the Owner's Manual provides convenient access to comprehensive information on your vehicle and your multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and various search options. Digital - as an App You can access comprehensive information on your vehicle and your multimedia system online on the go or download it, even while offline. Available for smartphones or tablets. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. 2315842001Z102 É2315842001Z102DËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 3 Introduction ......................................... 23 Digital Owner's Manual ...................... 22 At a glance ........................................... 30 Safety ................................................... 39 Opening and closing ........................... 77 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 101 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 113 Climate control ................................. 122 Driving and parking .......................... 131 On-board computer and displays .... 199 Multimedia system ........................... 253 Stowing and features ....................... 262 Maintenance and care ...................... 276 Breakdown assistance ..................... 287 Wheels and tyres .............................. 304 Technical data ................................... 320 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ................................ 62 Important safety notes .................... 62 Warning lamp ................................. 246 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 260 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 128 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 124 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 208 Display message ............................ 233 Function/notes ............................. 193 Active Body Control (ABC) CURVE ........................................... 177 Vehicle level .................................. 175 Active Body Control (ABC) (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Comfort ......................................... 177 Driving dynamics display ............... 177 Normal level .................................. 176 Operation/notes ............................ 175 Raised level ................................... 176 Sport .............................................. 177 Sport Plus ...................................... 177 Vehicle level .................................. 175 Active Body Control (ABC) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Comfort ......................................... 179 Driving dynamics display ............... 180 Normal level .................................. 179 Operation/notes ............................ 178 Raised level ................................... 178 Sport .............................................. 179 Vehicle level .................................. 178 Active Body Control (except Mercedes-AMG Vehicles) Display message ............................ 231 Active Body Control (MercedesAMG Vehicles) Display message ............................ 231 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating .............. 207 Display message ............................ 222 Function/notes ................................ 64 Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function Activating or deactivating .............. 207 Display message ............................ 223 Function/notes ................................ 72 Important safety notes .................... 72 Warning lamp ................................. 251 Active Driving Assistance package .. 193 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 208 Display message ............................ 233 Function/notes ............................. 195 Active light function ......................... 116 Active Parking Assist Detecting parking spaces .............. 184 Exiting a parking space .................. 186 Function/notes ............................. 183 Important safety notes .................. 183 Parking .......................................... 185 Adaptive adjustable damping Driving dynamics display ............... 175 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 66 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 67 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 174 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Display message ............................ 228 Function/notes ............................. 116 Switching on/off ........................... 117 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 325 Address book See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Adjusting the volume COMAND Online ............................ 254 3 4 Index Adjusting volume Audio 20 ........................................ 254 Air conditioning General notes ................................ 122 AIR FLOW ........................................... 125 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 130 Important safety notes .................. 129 Setting ........................................... 129 Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents ............................. 130 Setting the centre air vents ........... 129 Setting the side air vents ............... 130 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 105 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 46 Headbag .......................................... 46 Introduction ..................................... 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 40 Airbags Display message ............................ 226 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 45 Important safety guidelines ............. 43 Sidebag ............................................ 45 Triggering ......................................... 51 AIRSCARF Switching on/off ........................... 105 AIRSCARF vents Setting the blower output .............. 130 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 74 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 74 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 210 Setting the colour (on-board computer) ............................................. 210 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 213 Anti-glare film .................................... 275 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 158 Ashtray ............................................... 267 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 207 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 207 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 281 Hiding a service message .............. 281 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 281 Service message ............................ 280 Special service requirements ......... 281 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 74 Function ........................................... 74 Switching off the alarm .................... 74 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 208 Display message ............................ 232 Function/notes ............................. 190 Audio 20 Switching on/off ........................... 253 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 204 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 228 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 136 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 135 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 226 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 46 Problems ......................................... 50 System self-test ............................... 48 Index Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Changing gear ............................... Display message ............................ Drive program display .................... Drive programs .............................. Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Gearshift recommendation ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Overview ........................................ Problem (fault) ............................... Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... 113 144 144 239 142 145 144 139 140 151 143 143 143 143 142 149 145 147 213 141 151 134 141 134 147 142 144 151 B Back button ....................................... 254 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 80 Important safety notes .................... 79 Replacing ......................................... 80 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 295 Display message ............................ 230 Important safety notes .................. 293 Jump starting ................................. 296 Overview ........................................ 293 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 51 Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 257 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 256 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Telephony ...................................... 256 Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 276 Closing ........................................... 277 Display message ............................ 241 Important safety notes .................. 276 Opening ......................................... 277 Boot Emergency release .......................... 89 Important safety notes .................... 85 Locking separately ........................... 89 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 88 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 86 Opening/closing (from the outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) ............ 87 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 85 Overview .......................................... 85 Power closing .................................. 84 Boot lid Display message ............................ 240 Opening dimensions ...................... 327 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 327 Boot separator Display message ............................ 241 Fitting .............................................. 96 General notes .................................. 95 Opening/closing .............................. 95 Removing ......................................... 96 Bottle holders .................................... 267 5 6 Index Brake EBD .................................................. 71 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake Assist with cross-traffic function Function/notes ................................ 63 Important safety notes .................... 63 Brake fluid Display message ............................ 221 Notes ............................................. 325 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 67 Display message ............................ 228 Brakes ABS .................................................. 62 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 BAS .................................................. 62 Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ........................................... 63 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 325 Display message ............................ 217 Driving tips .................................... 157 High-performance brake system .... 158 Important safety notes .................. 157 Parking brake ................................ 154 Warning lamp ................................. 245 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 287 see Flat tyre see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 32 C Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities (technical data) ............... Car see Vehicle Car wash (care) ................................. Care Automatic car wash ....................... Exhaust pipe .................................. 322 282 282 285 CD Exterior lighting ............................. High-pressure cleaner .................... Matt paintwork .............................. Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. Reversing camera .......................... Sensors ......................................... Washing by hand ........................... Wheels ........................................... Windows ........................................ Wiper blades .................................. 285 283 283 281 283 285 285 282 284 284 284 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 205 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 211 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 77 Centre console Lower section .................................. 35 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36 Upper section .................................. 34 Child Restraint system .............................. 55 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 57 ISOFIX .............................................. 56 On the front-passenger seat ............ 56 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 57 Recommendations ........................... 60 Suitable positions ............................ 58 Cigarette lighter ................................ 268 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 285 Climate control Controlling automatically ............... 125 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 128 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 124 Demisting the windows .................. 127 Demisting the windscreen ............. 126 Indicator lamp ................................ 125 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 123 Overview of systems ...................... 122 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 128 Index Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 125 Setting the air distribution ............. 126 Setting the air vents ...................... 129 Setting the airflow ......................... 126 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 125 Setting the temperature ................ 125 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 128 Switching on/off ........................... 124 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 129 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 127 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 126 THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 123 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 see Instrument cluster Collapsible emergency spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel COMAND Online Driving dynamics display (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 175, 177 Driving dynamics display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 180 Switching on/off ........................... 253 Combination switch .......................... 115 Connecting a USB device See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 202 Controller ........................................... 254 Convenience closing feature .............. 91 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 128 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 279 Display message ............................ 229 Important safety notes .................. 325 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Temperature gauge ........................ 200 Warning lamp ................................. 249 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. Cornering light function Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. 29 228 116 160 161 236 159 159 160 160 161 160 266 266 D Data see Technical data Data carrier Selecting ........................................ 205 Data modem mode Telephone with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ........................................... 259 Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 228 Function/notes ............................. 113 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 209 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 25 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 210 Interior lighting .............................. 211 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Digital Owner's Manual Help ................................................. 22 Introduction ..................................... 22 Digital speedometer ......................... 203 7 8 Index Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 228 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 113 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 210 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Display message Driving systems ............................. 231 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 243 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 280 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 216 Engine ............................................ 229 General information ....................... 216 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 216 Key ................................................ 243 Lights ............................................. 228 Safety systems .............................. 217 Tyres .............................................. 237 Vehicle ........................................... 239 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activating ....................................... 163 Calling up the speed ...................... 164 Cruise control lever ....................... 163 Deactivating ................................... 167 Display Message ............................ 234 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 166 Driving tips .................................... 167 Function/notes ............................. 161 Important safety notes .................. 162 Selecting ........................................ 163 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 165 Stopping ........................................ 165 Storing the speed .......................... 164 Warning lamp ................................. 251 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 65 Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 251 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 211 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 77 Control panel ................................... 38 Display message ............................ 241 Emergency locking ........................... 84 Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 82 Opening (from the inside) ................ 83 Power closing .................................. 84 Doors Overview .......................................... 82 Draught stop Electrical draught stop ..................... 98 Manual draught stop ........................ 97 Drive program Display ........................................... 142 Drive programs Automatic transmission ................. 145 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 281 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 113 Driving on flooded roads .................. 158 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 64 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 71 STEER CONTROL ............................. 74 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62 Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function ................................. 72 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 67 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62 Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ........................................... 63 Distance warning function ............... 65 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 67 Important safety guidelines ............. 62 Overview .......................................... 61 Driving system Active Body Control (ABC) (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 175 Active Body Control (ABC) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 178 Adaptive Damping System ............. 174 Index Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot ... RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ Speed limiter ................................. Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist ................. Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ Active Parking Assist ..................... ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ Cruise control ................................ Display message ............................ Distronic Plus ................................ HOLD function ............................... PARKTRONIC ................................. Reversing camera .......................... Traffic Sign Assist .......................... Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Subjecting brakes to a load ........... Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... See also Digital Owner's Manual ... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 168 173 170 193 193 195 183 190 159 231 161 172 180 187 191 158 158 144 157 167 157 113 159 158 158 156 155 159 158 158 131 307 157 113 157 205 253 139 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 140 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 211 Function/notes ............................. 106 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 108 Function/notes ............................. 106 Switching on/off ........................... 211 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ................................ 71 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 156 On-board computer ....................... 202 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 136 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 135 Deactivating/activating ................. 136 General information ....................... 135 Important safety notes .................. 135 Introduction ................................... 135 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 79 General notes .................................. 79 Inserting .......................................... 79 Locking vehicle ................................ 84 Removing ......................................... 79 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 84 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 318 Important safety notes .................. 318 Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 319 9 10 Index Removing ....................................... 318 Storage location ............................ 318 Technical data ............................... 318 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................. 84 Engine Display message ............................ 229 ECO start/stop function ................ 135 Jump-starting ................................. 296 Running irregularly ......................... 138 Starting problems .......................... 138 Starting the engine with the key .... 134 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 134 Stopping ........................................ 153 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 301 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 249 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 320 Problem (fault) ............................... 138 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 325 Checking the oil level ..................... 277 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 278 Display message ............................ 230 Filling capacity ............................... 325 General notes ................................ 324 Notes about oil grades ................... 324 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 277 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Topping up ..................................... 278 Entering an address See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 23 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 213 Characteristics ................................. 67 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 70 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 69 Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ................................ 67 General notes .................................. 67 Important safety guidelines ............. 67 Warning lamp ................................. 246 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 67 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 285 Exterior lighting Settings options ............................. 113 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 108 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 109 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 212 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 109 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 109 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 109 Parking position ............................. 110 Resetting ....................................... 109 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 111 F Fault message see Display messages Favourites Overview ........................................ Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... First-aid kit ......................................... Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... Lowering the vehicle ...................... Preparing the vehicle ..................... Raising the vehicle ......................... Removing a wheel .......................... Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ Flat tyre MOExtended tyres ......................... Preparing the vehicle ..................... TIREFIT kit ...................................... see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. Foglamps Extended range .............................. 254 287 287 316 316 313 313 315 313 289 289 290 274 116 Index Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 272 Mobile phone ................................. 320 Two-way radio ................................ 320 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 226 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 46 Problems ......................................... 50 System self-test ............................... 48 Front-passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 103 Fuel Additives ........................................ 324 Consumption statistics .................. 202 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 202 Displaying the range ...................... 202 Driving tips .................................... 156 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Grade (petrol) ................................ 323 Important safety notes .................. 322 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 324 Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 Refuelling ....................................... 151 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 323 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 152 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 202 Gauge .............................................. 32 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 323 Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 288 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 301 Before changing ............................. 301 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 301 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 302 Fuse box in the rear compartment .. 302 Important safety notes .................. 301 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 271 Frequencies ................................... 272 General notes ................................ 269 Important safety notes .................. 270 Opening/closing the garage door .. 271 Problems when programming ........ 271 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 270 Synchronising the rolling code ....... 271 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 213 Gearshift paddles see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 213 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 23 Glove compartment .......................... 262 Google™ Local Search See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 H HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87 Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 242 Switching on/off ........................... 115 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 105 Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 103 see NECK-PRO head restraints Headbag Display message ............................ 225 Operation ......................................... 46 Headlamp flasher .............................. 115 Headlamps see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 283 Hill start assist .................................. 135 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 173 Activation conditions ..................... 173 Deactivating ................................... 173 Display message ............................ 232 11 12 Index General notes ................................ 172 Home address See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Horn ...................................................... 30 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 74 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 248 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 249 Engine diagnostics ......................... 249 SPORT handling mode ................... 248 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 228 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 199 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 209 Display message ............................ 228 Overview ........................................ 115 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 210 Interior lighting Automatic control system .............. 118 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 211 Overview ........................................ 117 Reading lamp ................................. 117 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 210 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 210 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 76 Function ........................................... 75 Priming ............................................ 75 Switching off .................................... 76 iPod® See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 56 J Jack Storage location ............................ 288 Using ............................................. 313 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 296 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 80 Checking the battery ....................... 80 Display message ............................ 243 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77 Emergency key element ................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 77 Loss ................................................. 81 Modifying the programming ............. 78 Opening/closing the roof ................ 95 Overview .......................................... 77 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 132 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Starting the engine ........................ 134 Key positions Key ................................................ 132 KEYLESS GO .................................. 132 KEYLESS-GO Activating ......................................... 78 Convenience closing ........................ 91 Deactivation ..................................... 78 Display message ............................ 243 Locking ............................................ 78 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 133 Start/Stop button .......................... 132 Starting the engine ........................ 134 Unlocking ......................................... 78 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 145 Manual gearshifting ....................... 150 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 213 Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 228 Index Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... Active light function ....................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Motorway mode ............................. Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ Side lamps ..................................... Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... Turn signals ................................... see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. Variable limiter .............................. Limiter Calling up the speed ...................... Deactivating, variable .................... Function/notes ............................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Permanent ..................................... 228 209 211 116 116 113 116 114 113 116 115 115 113 115 116 114 114 210 210 114 209 210 210 115 160 163 170 171 172 170 170 172 Setting a speed .............................. 171 Storing the current speed .............. 171 Switching to passive ...................... 171 Variable ......................................... 170 Limiting the speed Speed limiter ................................. 170 LINGUATRONIC see Separate operating instructions Loading aid (boot) Raising/lowering the roof .............. 264 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 84 Emergency locking ........................... 84 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 83 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 211 Luggage cover see Boot separator M M+S tyres ........................................... 306 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 98 Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 116 Display message ............................ 228 Switching on/off ........................... 115 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 283 Media Interface see Separate operating instructions Memory card (audio) ......................... 205 Memory function ............................... 111 Mercedes connect me Display message ............................ 222 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 193 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 195 Active Parking Assist ..................... 183 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 190 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot ... 168 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 53 13 14 Index Reversing camera .......................... 187 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 191 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 216 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 256 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 257 Connecting the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ......... 259 Frequencies ................................... 320 Installation ..................................... 320 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 205 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 268 Transmission output (maximum) .... 320 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 78 MOExtended tyres ............................. 289 Motorway mode ................................ 116 MP3 Operating ....................................... 205 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 201 Permanent display ......................... 209 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 200 Overview .......................................... 33 Music files See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes .................... 52 Operation ......................................... 53 Resetting triggered .......................... 53 Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 131 O Occupant safety Airbags ............................................ 43 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 46 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 Important safety notes .................... 39 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ................................................. 40 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 61 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 53 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 53 Restraint system introduction .......... 39 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40 Odometer see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 213 Assistance menu ........................... 207 Audio menu ................................... 204 Convenience submenu .................. 211 Display messages .......................... 216 Displaying a service message ........ 281 Factory setting submenu ............... 212 Important safety notes .................. 199 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 209 Light submenu ............................... 209 Menu overview .............................. 202 Message memory .......................... 216 Navigation menu ............................ 203 Operating the TV ............................ 205 Operating video DVD ..................... 205 Operation ....................................... 200 RACETIMER ................................... 213 Service menu ................................. 208 Settings menu ............................... 208 Standard display ............................ 202 Telephone menu ............................ 205 Trip menu ...................................... 202 Vehicle submenu ........................... 211 Index Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 24 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Important safety note ...................... 24 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Owner's Manual .................... 22 Outside temperature display ........... 199 Overhead control panel ...................... 37 P Paint code .......................................... 321 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 283 Panic alarm .......................................... 39 Panoramic roof Operating the roller sunblind ........... 98 Parking Important safety notes .................. 153 Parking brake ................................ 154 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 110 Reversing camera .......................... 187 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 183 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 155 Applying or releasing manually ...... 154 Display message ............................ 219 Electric parking brake .................... 154 Emergency braking ........................ 155 General information ....................... 154 Releasing automatically ................. 155 Warning lamp ................................. 248 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 228 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Parking Pilot Display Message ............................ 233 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 182 Driving system ............................... 180 Function/notes ............................. 180 Important safety notes .................. 180 Problem (fault) ............................... 183 Sensor range ................................. 180 Warning display ............................. 181 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 226 Indicator lamps ................................ 40 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 226 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 61 Phone book See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Power closing ...................................... 84 Power socket Boot ............................................... 268 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 53 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 222 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 53 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74 Immobiliser ...................................... 74 Interior motion sensor ..................... 75 Tow-away protection ........................ 75 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 23 Pulling away General notes ................................ 134 Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 134 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 15 16 Index R RACE START important safety notes ................... 173 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 173 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 213 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 204 see separate operating instructions Radio mode See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Reading lamp ..................................... 117 Rear foglamp Display message ............................ 228 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Rear lamps see Lights Rear window heating General notes ................................ 127 Problem (fault) ............................... 128 Switching on/off ........................... 127 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 109 Dipping (manual) ........................... 108 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 151 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 324 Refuelling process ......................... 152 see Fuel Remote control Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 270 Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 118 Rescue card ......................................... 28 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 231 Warning lamp ................................. 249 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 129 Restraint system Display message ............................ 224 Introduction ..................................... 39 Warning lamp ................................. 248 Warning lamp (function) ................... 40 Rev counter ........................................ 199 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 143 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 285 Display in the multimedia system .. 187 Function/notes ............................. 187 Switching on/off ........................... 187 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 90 Reversing function Boot lid ............................................ 85 Reversing lamp (display message) .. 228 Roll bar Display message ............................ 224 Operation ......................................... 50 Roller sunblind .................................... 98 Roof Display message ............................ 242 Important safety notes .................... 93 Opening/closing (with key) .............. 95 Opening/closing (with roof switch) ............................................. 94 Overview .......................................... 93 Problem (malfunction) ................... 100 Relocking ......................................... 95 Roof switch .......................................... 94 Route guidance See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 see Occupant safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD memory card Ejecting .......................................... 260 Inserting ........................................ 260 Inserting/removing ........................ 260 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Selecting ........................................ 205 Seat belt Correct usage .................................. 42 Seat belt guide ............................... 103 Index Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 212 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 43 Fastening ......................................... 42 Important safety guidelines ............. 41 Introduction ..................................... 41 Releasing ......................................... 43 Warning lamp ................................. 244 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 102 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 103 Belt guide ...................................... 103 Correct driver's seat position ........ 101 Important safety notes .................. 101 Overview ........................................ 101 Seat heating problem .................... 105 Seat ventilation problem ................ 105 Sliding forward/back ..................... 104 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 111 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 105 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 104 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 105 Selector lever Positions ........................................ 141 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 285 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 208 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 325 Coolant (engine) ............................ 325 Engine oil ....................................... 324 Fuel ................................................ 322 Important safety notes .................. 322 Washer fluid ................................... 326 Setting the air distribution ............... 126 Setting the airflow ............................ 126 Setting the date/time format See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Setting the language See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Setting the time See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 212 On-board computer ....................... 208 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 213 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 114 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 91 Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening/closing (front) ................... 90 Opening/closing (rear) .................... 91 Opening/closing all ......................... 91 Overview .......................................... 89 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93 Resetting ......................................... 92 Reversing feature ............................. 90 Sidebag ................................................ 45 SIM card Inserting ........................................ 258 SMS See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 Snow chains ...................................... 307 Socket Front-passenger footwell ............... 268 Sockets General notes ................................ 268 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 254 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Spectacles compartment ................. 263 Speed limiter Display message ............................ 235 Important safety notes .................. 170 Selecting ........................................ 171 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 203 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Segments ...................................... 199 Selecting a display unit .................. 209 17 18 Index SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 70 Warning lamp ................................. 248 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 133 STEER CONTROL .................................. 74 Steering Display message ............................ 241 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Activating/deactivating ................. 207 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot Display message ............................ 235 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 200 Important safety notes .................. 106 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 111 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 147 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 213 Stowage areas ................................... 262 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 262 Centre console .............................. 263 Centre console (rear) ..................... 263 Cup holder ..................................... 266 Glove compartment ....................... 262 Important safety information ......... 262 Rear ............................................... 264 Spectacles compartment ............... 263 Stowage net ....................................... 264 Stowage space Display message ............................ 241 Stowage net ................................... 264 Umbrella holder ............................. 263 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 266 Summer tyres .................................... 306 Sun visor ............................................ 267 Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. Suspension settings Active Body Control (ABC) (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... Active Body Control (ABC) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 210 176 179 213 260 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ see Lights Technical data Capacities ...................................... Emergency spare wheel ................. Information .................................... Tyres/wheels ................................. Vehicle data ................................... Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Authorising a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... Connecting a Mobile phone (general information) ............................ Display message ............................ Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialling ....................................... Rejecting/ending a call ................. See also Digital Owner's Manual ... Switching between mobile phones ........................................... Telephone compartment ................ Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Activating and connecting the module ........................................... Charging a mobile phone ............... Connecting the mobile phone ........ Connecting the module using a USB cable ...................................... Data modem mode ........................ Installing the module ..................... 228 322 318 320 317 327 206 256 256 241 205 206 206 206 253 257 262 258 260 259 258 259 258 Index Introduction ................................... 257 Saving/deleting the PIN for the SIM card ........................................ 259 Settings ......................................... 259 SIM card mode .............................. 258 Text messages ............................... 260 Transferring the phone book .......... 259 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 200 Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Outside temperature ...................... 199 Setting (climate control) ................ 125 Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 213 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 159 Text messages Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ....................... 260 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 213 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 290 Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................. 290 Storage location ............................ 288 Tyre pressure not reached ............. 291 Tyre pressure reached ................... 292 Total distance recorder .................... 202 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 75 Deactivating ..................................... 75 Function ........................................... 75 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 301 Important safety notes .................. 298 Towing Important safety notes .................. 298 Transporting the vehicle ................ 300 With the rear axle raised ................ 300 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 299 Removing the towing eye ............... 299 With both axles on the ground ....... 300 Traffic Sign Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Important safety notes .................. Instrument cluster display ............. Transmission Selector lever ................................ see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... Transporting the vehicle .................. Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... TV Operating (on-board computer) ..... see Separate operating instructions Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre changing tool kit ....................... Tyre inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. 207 232 191 192 192 141 142 300 202 202 203 115 205 320 320 320 288 309 237 291 292 307 308 309 309 310 309 309 310 19 20 Index Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Information on driving .................... M+S tyres ...................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Overview ........................................ Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Summer tyres ................................ Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... Wheel and tyre combinations ........ see Flat tyre 311 311 252 311 312 304 312 237 304 304 306 306 304 312 305 313 306 317 305 317 U Umbrella holder ................................. 263 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 83 Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 213 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 261 V Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 239 Electronics ..................................... 320 Equipment ....................................... 24 Implied warranty .............................. 28 Individual settings .......................... 208 Leaving parked up ......................... 155 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 Locking (key) ................................... 77 Lowering ........................................ 316 Pulling away ................................... 134 Raising ........................................... 313 Registration ..................................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 313 Tow-starting ................................... 298 Towing away .................................. 298 Transporting .................................. 300 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Unlocking (key) ................................ 77 Vehicle data ................................... 327 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ....................................... 327 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 327 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 321 Vehicle level Active Body Control (ABC) (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 175 Active Body Control (ABC) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 178 Display message ............................ 231 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 288 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 205 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 253 VIN Seat ............................................... 322 Type plate ...................................... 321 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ Active Brake Assist ........................ Brake Assist ................................... Brakes ........................................... Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. Distance warning signal ................. ESP® .............................................. ESP® OFF ....................................... Fuel tank ........................................ General notes ................................ LIM (cruise control) ........................ 246 251 251 245 251 251 246 247 249 244 160 Index LIM (Distance Pilot DISTRONIC) .... LIM (variable limiter) ...................... Parking brake ................................ PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... Reserve fuel ................................... Seat belt ........................................ Tyre pressure monitor ................... Warning triangle ................................ Washer fluid Display message ............................ Wheel and tyre combinations Tyres .............................................. Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... Wheel chock ...................................... Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... Changing/replacing ....................... Checking ........................................ Cleaning ......................................... Emergency spare wheel ................. Fitting a new wheel ........................ Fitting a wheel ............................... Important safety notes .................. Information on driving .................... Overview ........................................ Removing a wheel .......................... Storing ........................................... Tightening torque ........................... Wheel size/tyre size ...................... Windows Cleaning ......................................... see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes .................. Topping up ..................................... Windscreen wipers Display message ............................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Replacing the wiper blades ............ Switching on/off ........................... Winter operation Important safety notes .................. Overview ........................................ Slippery road surfaces ................... 163 170 248 40 249 244 252 287 242 317 316 313 312 312 304 284 318 316 313 304 304 304 315 313 316 317 284 126 326 280 242 121 119 118 306 306 159 Snow chains .................................. Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. M+S tyres ...................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 307 211 306 284 119 119 Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 126 21 Digital Owner's Manual 22 Introduction The printed Owner's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Owner's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on the equipment in your vehicle and your multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Owner's Manual using the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Owner's Manual. The Digital Owner's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Owner's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Owner's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Press the Ø button in the centre console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Owner's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Owner's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Owner's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 254). Content pages You can access the content pages by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Owner's Manual: select the Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the centre console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Owner's Manual remains open in the background. X Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Introduction Protection of the environment 23 Introduction 24 Operating safety You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 321) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Operating safety If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Z Introduction Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 25 26 Operating safety Introduction TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: CE EC declaration of conformity in accordance with EC Directive with regard to 2006/42/EC on machinery, Annex II B The equipment / machinery Make: Integrated kit Type/model: 10-300-0002 Serial numbers: Year of manufacture: was developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with EC Directives 2006/42/EC on machinery and 2004/108/EC on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as sole responsibility of active Tools Europe GmbH Otto-Hahn-Str. 72 32108 Bad Salzuflen Germany The following harmonised standards were applied: Designation Track Edition IEC 61000-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), interference immunity 2005 IEC 61000-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), interference emission 2005 EN ISO 12100-1 Safety of machinery 2009 DIN EN 1012-1 Compressors and vacuum pumps - Safety requirements Part 2010 1: Compressors DIN EN 894-1 Safety of machinery - Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators - Part 1: General principles 2008 DIN EN 894-2 Safety of machinery - Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators - Part 2: Displays 2008 DIN EN 55014-1 Electromagnetic compatibility - Requirements for household 2011 appliances, electric tools and similar apparatus - Part 1: Emission DIN EN 55014-2 Electromagnetic compatibility - Requirements for household 2008 appliances, electric tools and similar apparatus - Part 2: Immunity The applicable safety and health protection requirements for the design and construction of machinery based on Annex I of the Directive on Machinery are complied with. Complete technical documentation is available 1 in the original version Operating safety 27 In the eventuality of modifications made to the machinery/equipment after delivery which have not been cleared with active Tools Europe GmbH, this declaration loses its validity. Authorised representative(s) for the compilation of the technical documentation, CE commissioner(s) 22.6.2015 [Name signatory] [Stamp] Date Signatory and details of signatory Signature Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Introduction The operating instructions for the machinery/machine part are available 1 in the language of the user's country: German Introduction 28 Data stored in the vehicle Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in a compact form, the most important information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connec- Copyright information Introduction tion with other information (if necessary, after consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. 29 Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Z 30 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 147 ; Combination switch 115 = To adjust the steering wheel electrically 106 ? Horn A Instrument cluster B PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel 32 180 37 Function Page D Climate control systems 122 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 132 132 F Cruise control lever 160 G Electric parking brake 154 H Light switch 113 I Diagnostics connection J To open the bonnet 27 277 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 180 = Combination switch 115 ? To adjust the steering wheel electrically 106 A Horn B Instrument cluster C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 37 32 147 Function Page D To open the bonnet E Diagnostics connection F Light switch 113 G Electric parking brake 154 H Ignition lock Start/Stop button 132 132 I Cruise control lever 160 J Climate control systems 122 277 27 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function (km/h) Function : Page Speedometer with segments Warning and indicator lamps: ! Electric parking brake (red) ! Electric parking brake (yellow) J Brakes (yellow) · Distance warning å ESP® OFF ! ABS J Brakes (red) L Dipped-beam headlamps T Side lamps K Main-beam headlamps ÷ ESP® 199 ; #! Turn signals 115 = Multifunction display 201 ? 248 248 245 251 246 246 245 114 114 115 246 Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 199). A B C Page Rev counter Warning and indicator lamps: M SPORT handling mode in Mercedes-AMG vehicles R Rear foglamp N This lamp has no function ; Engine diagnostics h Tyre pressure monitor 6 Restraint system ü Seat belts 199 Coolant temperature gauge Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant 200 248 114 249 252 40 244 249 Fuel gauge display Warning and indicator lamps: 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler cap location indicator (right-hand side) 249 Instrument cluster lighting 199 Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC 8 Mutes WX Adjusts the volume ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory Page 201 205 i In vehicles with the COMAND Online multi- media system you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual Ron LINGUATRONIC in the separate operating instructions Function ? =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC Page 200 200 200 216 200 34 Centre console Centre console At a glance Centre console, upper section Function Page : COMAND Online ; c Seat heating 104 = s Seat ventilation 105 ? Ò AIRSCARF 105 A c PARKTRONIC 180 B £ Hazard warning lamps 115 i In vehicles with the COMAND Online multi- media system you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual Ron LINGUATRONIC in the separate operating instructions Function C a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp D å ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) è ECO start/stop button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Page 40 67 135 Centre console 35 At a glance Centre console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function Page : Stowage compartment Cup holders Ashtray ; COMAND controller = Seat adjustment ? Favourites button A Roof switch 94 B Opens/closes the side windows 91 C Extends/retracts the draught stop 98 D Stowage compartment with Media Interface Cigarette lighter 262 E Selects park position 141 F è ECO start/stop button 135 263 266 267 Function G Page Shows the driving conditions menu in the COMAND display (vehicles with Active Body Control) 175 É Adjusts the vehicle level (vehicles with Active Body Control) 175 Adjusts the suspension settings Adjusts the suspension settings (vehicles with Active Body Control) 176 Ú Selects the drive program/program selector button 147 K Transmission positions 144 L Selector lever 141 H I J 36 Centre console At a glance Centre console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function : Stowage compartment Cup holders Ashtray Page 263 266 267 ; COMAND controller = Seat adjustment ? Favourites button A Roof switch 94 B Opens/closes the side windows 91 C Extends/retracts the draught stop 98 D Stowage compartment with Media Interface Cigarette lighter 262 Function Page E Selects park position 141 F Drive program selector 140 G ß AMG button (calls up/ stores drive program or suspension setting) 140 H à Adjusts the suspension setting 140 I å ESP® J Transmission positions 144 K Selector lever 141 67 Overhead control panel 37 At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 117 ; c Switches the interior lighting on/off 117 = µ Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL 98 ? | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 117 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 117 A Function Page B ë Deactivates tow-away protection C Rear-view mirror 109 D Buttons for the garage door opener 271 E ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 75 F Spectacles compartment 75 263 38 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 83 A ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle o Opens/closes the boot lid 88 83 B = Adjusts the seats 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 108 ? r45= Stores seat, exterior mirror and steering column adjustment settings w Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the driver’s seat W Opens/closes the side windows 89 101 C 111 103 Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed. X To deactivate: press the ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. X Occupant safety The various components of the restraint system work complementary to one another. They can only perform their intended protective function if all vehicle occupants: Rhave correctly fastened their seat belt (Y page 42) Rhave correctly adjusted their seat and head restraint (Y page 101). As the driver, you must also ensure that the steering wheel is correctly adjusted. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 101). Additionally, you must ensure that an airbag can deploy freely (Y page 43). The airbag is supplementary to a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. If the protection provided by the seat belt is sufficient, the airbags do not deploy. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, only airbags which provide greater protection in the given accident situation deploy. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on how the restraint system operates can be found in "Deployment of the seat belt tensioner and airbags" (Y page 51). See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children(Y page 54). Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system includes: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing system Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop for details. Z 39 Safety Occupant safety 40 Occupant safety Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Safety Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the automatic deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a rearward-facing child restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). RChildren in a forward-facing child restraint system: depending on the installed child restraint system and the age and size of the child, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. Therefore, it is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is enabled. Depending on the build of the person on the frontpassenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may light up. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger seat should not be used. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46) as well as on "Seat belts" (Y page 41) and "Airbags" (Y page 43). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Occupant safety Introduction A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the airbag being deployed. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts Rbelt tensioners and belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by the seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the event of a collision so that it fits tightly across your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest. The belt tensioner does not, however, correct an incorrect seat position or correct the routing of a seat belt that is worn incorrectly. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46) Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the child restraint Z Safety Seat belts 41 42 Occupant safety system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Safety Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise, your vehicle's general operating permit could be invalidated. Correct seat belt use Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat belt (Y page 41). All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts correctly before you start driving. You must also make sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts correctly during the journey. When fastening your seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt buckle that belongs to the seat. Rthe seat belt is tightened across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as possible over your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. Pregnant women must take particular care with this. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If such objects are located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys, spectacles, etc. stow these in a suitable location. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Babies and children must never travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. You must also make sure that objects, e.g. cushions, are never placed between a person and the seat. Seat belts are solely intended to secure and restrain persons. To secure objects, luggage or loads, always observe the information under "Stowage options/compartments" (Y page 262). Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 41) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 42). The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 212). Belt warning for the driver and front passenger Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 101). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat belt guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically; see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 43). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press release button in belt buckle, hold belt tongue firmly and guide the seat belt back. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone stops as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's seat belts have been fastened. Airbags Introduction The airbag installation location is identified by the label AIRBAG. An airbag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. It is not a substitute for seat belts. The airbag provides additional protection in the corresponding accident situations. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The various airbag systems work independently of one another (Y page 51). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Due to the required speed of the airbag after deployment, it is also not possible to entirely rule out the risk of injuries caused by the airbag. Important safety notes G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause addiZ 43 Safety Occupant safety 44 Occupant safety tional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Safety Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. ROnly secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearward-facing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 40). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the manufacturer's operating and installation instructions for the child restraint system. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors or side windows. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Occupant safety Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Safety passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. 45 Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the driver's and front-passenger seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 40). The front-passenger front airbag will only deploy if: Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 46). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 46) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Sidebags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic co-driver's front airbag deactivation system may also be Sidebags : deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Z 46 Occupant safety Safety Headbags Headbags : deploy in the area of the side windows at the front. When deployed, the headbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the: Rchest Rarms In the event of a side impact, the headbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a headbag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 51). correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then is the correct function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system guaranteed. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Operation of automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Introduction In order to recognise a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system categorises the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front airbag is either enabled or disabled. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted to the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up after the system self-test and remain lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. The system does not disable: Rthe sidebag Rthe front-passenger headbag Rthe seat belt tensioner If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag: RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an airbag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 226). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey. If a person sits in the passenger seat, they must be: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system may be influenced, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion The front-passenger front airbag may be disabled by mistake as a result of these or similar actions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. The front-passenger front airbag does not then deploy during an accident. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always make sure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and that the front- passenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 50). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the Z 47 Safety Occupant safety 48 Occupant safety Safety shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the belt guide. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system detects that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. But in the case of a child in a rearward-facing child restraint, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp can light up after the system self-test and remain lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. Make sure that the conditions for a correct classification are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp remains on, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a forward-facing child restraint system, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system selftest depending on the result of the classification. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 56) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 58). Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person with a smaller build should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The frontpassenger seat should only be repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front airbag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: in the front-passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardsfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the rear reclining seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 46). Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 50). Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. This could result Z 49 Safety Occupant safety 50 Occupant safety Problems with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 48). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is false. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person lights up and remains lit, on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 46). even though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpassenger seat is occupassenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a perX Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sysson with a build corretem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. sponding to that of an adult. The PASSENGER AIR The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is BAG OFF indicator lamp malfunctioning. does not light up and/or X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint does not stay on. system. The front-passenger seat X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on is: the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Rempty X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Roccupied with a rearX When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat ward-facing child belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Roll bars G DANGER If the roll bar has developed a fault, it may not function, e.g. in the event of an accident. The roll bars may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have roll bars checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you place objects or clothing on the roll bar covers, these could impair roll bar extension. The roll bars may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, objects could endanger the vehicle occupants when the roll bar is extending. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Ensure that the movement area of the roll bar covers is kept clear. Always stow all objects in the vehicle correctly. The roll bars are located in the rear area of the vehicle under the two outer rear compartment trim covers. They extend if systems detect that the vehicle is in danger of overturning. The two outer rear compartment trim covers are opened and the roll bars are extended within fractions of a second. Once the roll bars are extended, you can no longer lower them. An open roof can no longer be closed. In this case, visit the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, par- ticularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rear collision. A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 40) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective seat If the restraint system control unit detects a high severity accident, in certain head-on collisions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other: Rfront airbags Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 40). Z 51 Safety Occupant safety Safety 52 Occupant safety Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if the second deployment stage is activated within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle overturns, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSidebag on the side on which an impact occurs, independent from the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage The sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - an occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RHeadbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independent of seat belt usage and regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RSeat belt tensioners, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection for the vehicle occupants in this situation RHeadbags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations if the vehicle overturns and if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision Rside impact Roverturn NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse unsuitable head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfil their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. This poses an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and only use suitable head restraint covers. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding the availability of suitable seat or head restraint covers. Occupant safety NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the NECKPRO head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seat (Y page 53). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognise when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for functionality at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints Do not place your fingers between the upholstery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of arrow ;. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECKPRO head restraint. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® informs you of certain critical driving situations and takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can take the following measures independently of each other: Rpre-tensioning the driver's and frontpassenger seatbelt. Rclosing the side windows. Rsetting a more favourable seat position for the front-passenger seat. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: increasing the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Should an accident not occur, the preventative measures taken are cancelled. Certain settings must be made yourself. X If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. Seat belt pre-tensioning is released. PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty Z Safety Operation 53 54 Children in the vehicle Safety The driver is not warned before the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene when reversing. When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rearend collision is imminent: - the rear hazard warning lamps are activated and flash at a higher frequency - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary - the seat belts are pre-tensioned The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is cancelled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures may be implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call Children in the vehicle Important safety notes If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Ralways pay attention to the instructions and safety notes on the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 46). G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Children in the vehicle Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 41) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 42). Child restraint system Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 58). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 60). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys- tems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely can be found under "Stowing options/stowage compartments" (Y page 262). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe ISOFIX securing rings If you fit a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 56). There you will also find information on disabling the frontpassenger front airbag. Z Safety G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 55 Children in the vehicle 56 Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care Safety products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. ISOFIX child seat securing system G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 58). Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ISO- FIX securing rings : for an ISOFIX child restraint system are fitted to the frontpassenger seat. If you are using an ISOFIX child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, where the child is not secured using the seat belt of the frontpassenger seat, the belt warning may be activated. In this case, insert the seat belt buckle tongue into the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat. Pass the seat belt between the ISOFIX child restraint system and the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. Non-ISOFIX child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 58). Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: if you fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 46). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ra child restraint system that is not detected by the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Rthe unintentional disabling of the frontpassenger front airbag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the frontpassenger sun visor; see the illustration. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 40). Vehicles without the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the frontpassenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. In this case, never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat (Y page 58). Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system" and "Forward-facing child restraint system" as well as information on the suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 58). Rearward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (Y page 40) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the front-passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the front-passenger seat belt guide. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly. Z 57 Safety Children in the vehicle 58 Children in the vehicle Safety Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUF in accordance with the "Suitability of the front passenger seat for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the frontpassenger seat for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system" table. Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: X Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 56). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the front-passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (Y page 57). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and into the highest position. X Fully retract the seat cushion length. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof. Adjust the backrest angle accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position. Children in the vehicle 59 Legend for the table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 60). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Front-passenger seat Weight category Front-passenger front airbag enabled Front-passenger front airbag disabled1 0 up to 10 kg X U, L 0+ up to 13 kg X U, L I 9 kg to 18 kg UF, L U, L II 15 kg to 25 kg UF, L U, L III 22 kg to 36 kg UF, L U, L Suitability of the front-passenger seat for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system: Legend for the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category, which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (Y page 60). The child restraint system manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Weight category Carry cot Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat2 F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 2 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and lowest position. 1 Z Safety Suitability of the front-passenger seat for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems Children in the vehicle 60 Safety Weight category Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat2 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL B ISO/F2 IL B1 ISO/F2X IL A ISO/F3 IL I 9 kg to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 56) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 58). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight categories Manufacturer Type Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 DUO plus 04 301133 970 16 00 04 301133 970 21 00 970 37 00 Category I: Britax Römer 9 kg to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years 2 3 Approval number (E1 ...) Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and lowest position. Colour code 9H95. Order number (A 000 ...)3 Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...)3 Category II/III: 15 kg to 36 kg between approximately 4 years and 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 970 22 00 04 301198 970 19 00 970 38 00 04 301304 970 61 00 Britax Römer KIDFIX XP Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight categories Size cat- Manufac- Type egory turer Approval number Order number (E1 ...) (A 000 ...)4 Category I: 9 kg to 18 kg B1 03 301133 04 301133 970 11 00 04 301133 970 16 00 04 301133 970 21 00 970 37 00 Britax Römer DUO plus Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box. 3 4 Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 62) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) RBrake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 63) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 64) RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 67) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 67) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 71) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 72) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 74) Colour code 9H95. Colour code 9H95. Z 61 Safety Driving safety systems 62 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres" section (Y page 304). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deac- tivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 246) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 217). Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Driving safety systems Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X Brake Assist with cross-traffic function General notes Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. The sensor system and camera system help Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as body contours and the posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 63). Important safety notes G WARNING Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the Brake Assist with crosstraffic function might: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify people, particularly if they are moving. Brake Assist with crosstraffic function cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING Brake Assist with cross-traffic function does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multistorey car parks Z Safety Brakes 63 64 Driving safety systems Safety Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range Detection by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windscreen, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. vehicles in front within a speed range between 7 km/h and 250 km/h. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are detected i If Brake Assist with cross-traffic function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated at the same time (Y page 53). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again if: Ryou release the brake pedal Rthere is no longer a risk of collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou activate kickdown Active Brake Assist Function General notes To avoid a collision, Brake Assist with crosstraffic function calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle and RBrake Assist with cross-traffic function has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is activated. Braking assistance from Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal sharply, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. Brake Assist with cross-traffic function provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist system supports you. Driving safety systems In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multistorey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after servicing is carried out on the Active Brake Assist system Observe the important safety notes in the "Running-in notes" section (Y page 131). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist is automatically active after switching on the ignition. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 207). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display. Distance warning function General notes The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 62). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. Rnot Function The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Rof approximately 30 km/h or more, if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rof approximately 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. Z Safety Important safety notes 65 66 Driving safety systems Safety With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist with the autonomous braking function. If the autonomous braking function demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7 - 105 km/h for moving objects R7 - 50 km/h for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the autonomous braking function to intervene. If the autonomous braking function demands a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 53). Adaptive Brake Assist General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h. It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. If Adaptive Brake Assist demands a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 53). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Driving safety systems Adaptive brake lights i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 115). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, e.g. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP®. i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle may be equipped with 20-inch tyres on the rear axle. If replaced with 19-inch tyres, ETS may intervene noticeably sooner for the first few kilometres. After approximately 10 km ETS will function as usual again. Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/ tyre combinations" (Y page 317). Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When towing away your vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 300). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, then ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 246) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 217). i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® ETS (Electronic Traction System) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. tion (Y page 62). Z Safety Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. 67 Driving safety systems 68 If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Safety X Driving safety systems 69 The influence of drive programs on ESP® Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics C Comfort E Economy ESP® on This drive program offers an ideal compromise between traction and stability. Select drive program E or C in difficult road conditions such as snow and ice or on wet roads. S Sport ESP® on This drive program offers an ideal compromise between traction and stability. S+ Sport Plus ESP® Sport The vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are emphasised. This enables a more active driving style. This drive program requires more interaction from the driver. Select this drive program only when road conditions are good, e.g. the roads are dry and the route is clear. Always adapt your driving style and drive program to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 145). ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). You can select between the following statuses of ESP®: RESP® RESP® Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Z Safety The drive programs allow ESP® to adapt to different weather conditions, road conditions and the desired driving style. The drive programs can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 139) or on AMG vehicles using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 140). Driving safety systems 70 Deactivating/activating ESP® Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 62). You can select between the following statuses of ESP®: RESP® is activated handling mode is activated RESP® is deactivated ESP® is activated every time the engine is switched on, regardless of whether ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off. RSPORT X To deactivate: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin RTraction control is still activated RActive Brake Assist is not available and is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist is not available and is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® continues to provide assistance when you brake firmly REngine G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle Driving safety systems if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® 71 Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin RTraction control is still activated RActive Brake Assist is no longer available and is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist is not available and is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® continues to provide assistance when you brake firmly REngine To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT han‐ dling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree RTraction control is still activated REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin RESP® continues to provide assistance when you brake firmly EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 62). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 246) as well as display messages (Y page 219). Z Safety RESP® 72 Driving safety systems ADAPTIVE BRAKE Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 172) and hill start assist (Y page 135). Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function General notes Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 62). Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. The radar sensor system and camera system help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as body contours and the posture of a person standing upright. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). Important safety notes G WARNING Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure. G WARNING Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function might: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake, especially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot always clearly identify people, particularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake, especially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function alerts you. Driving safety systems G WARNING Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, Active Brake Assist with crosstraffic function may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multistorey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Detection by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windscreen, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function To activate or deactivate: activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). When Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display of the multifunction display. This function will issue a warning if: Rat a speed of approximately 30 km/h or higher, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for several seconds. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or higher, you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 7 km/h and 200 km/h Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle X i If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 53). Z Safety In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. 73 Safety 74 Protection against theft If the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further Ractivating kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal The braking application of Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is ended automatically if: Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle Rthere is no longer a risk of collision Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle Protection against theft Immobiliser To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid key that is left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) STEER CONTROL General notes STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering support is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is deactivated RESP® is malfunctioning Rthe steering is faulty If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet Rthe glove compartment Rthe stowage space under the armrest Ra stowage compartment in the rear Protection against theft X or To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm stops. Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm stops. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm stops. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm stops. The alarm does not switch off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. 75 Deactivating Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Activating Make sure that: doors are closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is tow-away protection activated. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Rthe Switching off X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Safety X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again Ra door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ris being transported Ris being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a splitlevel garage X X Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Priming Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe roof is closed Rthe stowage compartment under the armrest is closed This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: X Z Protection against theft 76 Rthe doors are closed boot lid is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor activated. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. Safety Rthe Switching off X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is automatically switched off. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes several times in rapid succession. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe side windows remain open The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again Ra door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a doublelock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. X X Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 82). Key Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). All countries: children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Key functions G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the boot lid = % Unlocks the vehicle Rshifting X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle locks again Rprotection against theft is reactivated X To lock centrally: press the & button. the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave Z Opening and closing Key 77 78 Key The key centrally locks/unlocks: doors Rthe boot lid Rthe glove compartment Rthe stowage compartment under the armrest Rthe stowage compartment in the rear compartment Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated or deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 211). When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 210). Opening and closing Rthe KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 134). Locking and unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you need to carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhilst driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. For further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 91). X Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a key for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESSGO function of the key. The key will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation or deactivation, the vehicle does not have to be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 80) of the key flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door, the lockable stowage compartment in the vehicle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when Key the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 80). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Removing the emergency key element or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the driver or front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 80). X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and, at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. Further information about: RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 84) RUnlocking the boot (Y page 89) RLocking the vehicle (Y page 84) Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an Z Opening and closing Rlocks 79 Key 80 Opening and closing environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Press the & or % button. The battery is OK if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 80). If the battery of the key is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover : shut. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert emergency key element ; into the key (Y page 79). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 81 Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the key battery (Y page 80) and replace if necessary the key. (Y page 80). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. Opening and closing There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X The key is faulty. Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated. unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78). KEYLESS-GO. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the key battery (Y page 80) and replace if necessary (Y page 80). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle cannot be locked/unlocked even using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 82 Doors Opening and closing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine can no longer The on-board voltage is too low. be started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 295). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 296). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using KEYLESSGO. The key is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. Check the key battery (Y page 80) and replace if necessary (Y page 80). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. X There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. X You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). All countries: Doors G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: 83 from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door to close. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window is raised again. X Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. For example, you can unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. The central locking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage compartments, such as the glove compartment. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X X Z Opening and closing Rclimb Doors Opening and closing 84 For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. United Kingdom only: you can only open a door from inside the vehicle if the double-lock function has been deactivated. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Automatic locking feature You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function using the on-board computer (Y page 211). Power closing Power closing pulls the doors and boot lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. X Power closing feature (doors): push the door past the first detent position into the lock. Power closing will pull the door fully closed. X To power close the boot lid: lightly push the boot lid closed. The power closing function pulls the boot lid closed. Unlocking/locking the driver's door using the emergency key element i In order to lock all of the vehicle's locks, begin by pressing the button for locking the vehicle from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to unlock the driver's door using the emergency key element. To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed Rthe vehicle is being towed Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer X To unlock: turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X To lock: turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Right-hand-drive vehicle: turn the emergency key element in the opposite direction in both cases. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). Boot Important safety notes G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. ! Only close the boot once the roof is lowered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 327). When the roof is open, you can use the loading aid to raise the folded roof in the boot to make loading easier (Y page 264). The boot separator opens automatically. You can unlock the boot lid when the vehicle is stationary and the roof is fully opened or closed. Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed from outside Ropened and closed automatically from outside (vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature) Ropened and closed automatically from inside (vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature) Ropened, closed or stopped during operation without the use of your hands (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS) Rlocked separately Runlocked with the emergency key element Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Boot lid reversing function The boot lid is equipped with an automatic reversing function. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the boot lid during the closing procedure. The boot lid opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness to the boot lid while it is closing. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers the last 8 mm of the closing path The reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rover Rpress the F button on the key or the remote operating switch on the driver’s door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid, or Rpull the boot lid handle Rpress Opening/closing from the outside Opening Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid. If the boot separator was previously closed, the boot separator opens and remains open. X X Z Opening and closing Boot 85 Boot 86 When the roof is open, you can use the loading aid to raise the folded roof and load the boot more easily (Y page 264). The boot separator then opens automatically. Closing ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 327). Opening and closing Opening automatically You can automatically open the boot lid using the boot lid handle. X If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately. When the roof is open, the boot separator closes automatically. If the boot separator was closed, it opens automatically and remains open. Pull the boot lid down using recess :. X Lock the vehicle if necessary using the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO. If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the boot, it does not lock. X Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can also be opened automatically with the key. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. Closing automatically Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the key or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid Rpull the boot lid handle Rpull X Press and release closing button : on the boot lid. Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the boot lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the boot lid. The boot separator, the loading aid and the boot lid are closed. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid closes and the vehicle locks. Boot 87 If a key with KEYLESS-GO is detected in the boot, the boot lid opens again after it is closed. It does not lock. HANDS-FREE ACCESS G WARNING The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make a leg movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the boot lid opening unintentionally: Rusing a car wash Rusing a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away from the vehicle. General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the boot lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. RAlways ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 30 cm away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. RUsing HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The boot lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the boot - set down or lift up an object behind the vehicle - polish the rear of the vehicle Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in such situations. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the boot. Z Opening and closing Important safety notes Boot 88 Operation Opening and closing automatically from the inside Opening and closing Important safety notes To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your foot. A warning tone will sound while the boot lid is opening or closing. X If the boot lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then kick under the bumper once again. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the boot lid does not open or close. Repeat the kicking movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure, you have the following options: RKick with your foot in sensor detection range : under the bumper. RPull the handle on the outside of the boot lid. RPress the closing button on the boot lid. RPull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the F button on the key. If the boot lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will open If the boot lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will close X G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To reopen the boot lid, pull on the remote operating switch. G WARNING The boot lid can be automatically opened or closed even if the key is not in the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could activate the functions. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 327). Opening and closing Side windows If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. Locking the boot separately The separate boot locking function is only available in certain countries. You can lock the boot separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). Turn the emergency key element from position 1 anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 2. When doing so, also pull the boot lid handle. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Side windows Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Pull out the emergency key element. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Z Opening and closing To open: pull remote operating switch : for the boot lid until the boot lid opens. If the boot separator was closed, it opens automatically and remains open. X To close: press remote operating switch : for the boot lid until the boot lid is closed. When the roof is open, the boot separator closes automatically. You can open and close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X 89 90 Side windows Opening and closing G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Opening and closing the side windows Opening and closing the side windows in the front The switches for the side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the frontpassenger door. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the upward movement of one of the front side windows during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid, not a substitute for your attention when closing the side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Rwhen : Left ; Right Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the corresponding switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. X Side windows To open: open the front side window on the corresponding side (Y page 90). X Press the corresponding switch again and release. The corresponding rear side window opens fully. X To stop the rear side windows: briefly pull the corresponding switch up and release. X To close: close the front side window on the corresponding side (Y page 90). X Pull the respective switch and hold it. The corresponding rear side window will continue to close until you release the switch. X Opening and closing all side windows Using the switch on the centre console G WARNING When a side window is closed, body parts may become trapped in the closing range. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that there are no body parts in the closing range of the window when closing it. If somebody becomes trapped, release the button immediately or press the lower section of the button to open the side window again. Using the switch on the centre console, you can close all side windows simultaneously. X Open the cover on the lower centre console. The switch for all side windows is under the cover. To open all side windows: press button : to the point of resistance. X To open all side windows fully: press button : beyond the point of resistance. X To close all side windows: pull button :. All side windows begin the closing procedure simultaneously. The rear side windows close after the front side windows. If, after opening the windows, you close one side window using the button in the door control panel: Rthe front side window closes first and Rthen the corresponding rear side window closes X Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO G WARNING When using convenience closing, you could become trapped within the sweep of the closing window. There is a risk of injury. Monitor the entire closing procedure when using convenience closing. When closing, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the closing area. Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: Release the recessed sensor surface on the door handle. X Immediately pull and hold the door handle and keep the door handle pulled. The side windows open. With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. X Z Opening and closing Opening/closing the rear side windows 91 Side windows 92 Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Opening and closing X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 90). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 90). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Roof 93 Problems with the side windows G WARNING Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Roof Important safety notes Only have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING ! Never sit on the rear compartment trim or If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurise after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely. ! Do not forget that the weather can change G WARNING ! When opening and closing the roof, make Closing the roof manually is a complex, technically challenging procedure that requires considerable effort during certain phases. You or others could be trapped while performing this task. There is a risk of injury. stow heavy objects there. You will otherwise damage the roof and rear compartment trim of the vehicle. abruptly. Make certain that the roof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. sure that: Rthere is sufficient upward clearance, as the roof swings upwards. Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the vehicle, as the boot lid swings backwards beyond the bumper. Z Opening and closing If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. 94 Roof Opening and closing Rthe boot is only loaded to below the boot separator. Rthe boot separator is not pushed up by the load. Rthe boot separator is closed. Rthe boot lid is closed. Rthe outside temperature is above Ò15 †. You could otherwise damage the roof, boot and other parts of the vehicle. The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing the roof can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 327). Make sure that the roof and rear window are dry and clean before opening the roof. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or boot. Opening and closing using the roof switch Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, boot lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. For safety reasons, the roof can only be opened or closed when the vehicle is stationary. Opening and closing Close the boot lid (Y page 85). If the boot is loaded correctly, the boot separator is automatically closed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the cover on the lower centre console. Roof switch : is located under the cover. X To open: pull roof switch : until the entire roof is stowed away in the boot. You see the Vario-roof in operation message in the multifunction display. As soon as the opening procedure has ended, the message disappears and you hear a tone. The front side windows close. The rear side windows open. X To close: press and hold soft-top switch : until the soft top is fully closed. You see the Vario-roof in operation message in the multifunction display. As soon as the closing procedure has ended, the message disappears and you hear a tone. All of the side windows close. X Make sure that all the side windows are fully closed. X ! Operating the roof while pulling away: RObserve the following traffic carefully. not drive faster than 40 km/h. RAvoid abrupt braking and swerving manoeuvres. Do not operate the roof when cornering, driving on uneven surfaces or during strong winds. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. RDo i If the traffic conditions mean that you have to drive off while opening/closing the roof, the procedure which was started while stationary can be continued at speeds of up to approx. 40 km/h. Opening and closing with the key Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, boot lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving Roof Opening and closing This function is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation. X Close the boot lid (Y page 85) If the boot has been correctly loaded the boot separator is automatically closed. X Vehicles with comfort operation: point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must be within 2 m of the vehicle. X To open: press and hold the % button on the key until the roof is fully opened. The roof and the rear side windows open. The front side windows close. X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the % button. X To open the front side windows: press the % button on the key again. X To close: press and hold the & button on the key until the roof is fully closed. The roof and the side windows close. X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the & button. Locking the roof again Important safety notes G WARNING Locking You can lock the roof again if it is not locked fully. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the roof switch (Y page 94). Boot separator General notes ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage when folding back the roof, you should: load the boot to below the boot separator Rnot place any objects on or in front of the boot separator Rnot place any objects on the cover behind the roll bars Rnot allow the load to push up the boot separator Ronly ! Make sure that the boot separator is fully closed. Otherwise, the roof could be blocked when opening or closing. The boot separator can be used to cover luggage and loads in the boot. Opening and closing If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurise after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely. The roof is not locked if: Rthe K symbol and the Vario-roof in operation message appears in the multifunction display Rthe K symbol and the Open/close vario-roof completely message appear and you hear a warning tone Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds when pulling away or while driving Boot separator : can be opened and closed using button ;, e.g. to check correct loading. Z Opening and closing components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. 95 Roof 96 To open: press button ;. To close: press button ;. If the boot is loaded correctly, boot separator : is automatically closed to the full extent. When the boot lid is opened, boot separator : opens automatically. X X Opening and closing Removing and fitting Turn catch lever A downwards in the direction of the arrow on both sides. Boot separator : is unlocked. X Slide boot separator cover : forwards. X Pull boot separator : out of the two guides in the direction of arrow B. X To remove: close boot separator : (Y page 95). X To disconnect the electric plug connector, press the release catch on connector ; and remove connector ;. X To fit: insert boot separator : into the two guides in the direction of arrow C to the stop. X Turn catch lever A upwards in the direction of the arrow on both sides. Boot separator : is locked. X Pull the net forwards and hook into the retainers on both sides. X Push boot separator cover : back against the spring pressure and insert to the end stop on both sides. X X Unhook net = from holders ? on both sides and guide it to the rear until it is completely rolled up. Roof 97 after you have stopped the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Reconnect connector ; of the electric plug connector. Draught stop Manual draught stop Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the draught stop in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the draught stop when visibility conditions are good. G WARNING If the draught stop is incorrectly fitted, it could detach itself during a journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Fit the draught stop as described. Do not place any objects on top of the fitted draught stop. ! Fit or remove the draught stop only when the roof is open. You could otherwise damage the draught stop or the vehicle interior. The draught stop offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The draught stop can be fitted or removed from the driver's side or passenger side. We recommend that a second person assists you when doing this. Perform operations involving the draught stop preferably on the side facing away from traffic, To fit: open the roof (Y page 94). Press the mark on cover : and push in the direction of the arrow. X Repeat the procedure with cover ;. The rear brackets for draught stop = are visible. X X Make sure that draught stop = is folded back. X Push the upper half of cover B on draught stop =. X Repeat the procedure with the cover on the driver's side. Draught stop = is unlocked. X Hold draught stop = at an angle and insert pins ? into the rear brackets. Make sure that pins ? sit correctly in the brackets. X Insert draught stop = into front brackets A. X Check whether draught stop = is correctly seated in all four brackets. X Z Opening and closing Fitting/removing Roof 98 Push the lower half of cover B on draught stop =. Draught stop = is locked. X Fold draught stop = forward if necessary. X To remove: make sure that draught stop = is folded back. X Push the upper half of cover B on draught stop =. Draught stop = is unlocked. X First remove draught stop = from front brackets A. X Hold draught stop = at an angle and then remove from the rear brackets. Opening and closing X X Slide covers : and ; of the rear brackets against the direction of the arrow until they are fully closed. X X To extend: press button :. To retract: press button : again. Roller sunblind for the panorama roof Electric draught stop Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the draught stop in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the draught stop when visibility conditions are good. ! When extending or retracting the draught stop, make sure there are no objects on the rear compartment trim. Otherwise, the objects could damage the draught stop. The draught stop offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The roof must be fully open before the draught stop can be extended. Extending and retracting Open the roof (Y page 93). X Open the cover on the lower centre console. The switch for the electrical draught stop is under the cover. X The roller sunblind protects you from excessive glare and heat caused by the sun shining through the panorama glass roof. X To close: pull the roller sunblind in the direction of the arrow using handle :. X To open: slide the roller sunblind in the opposite direction to the arrow using handle :. MAGIC SKY CONTROL General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically after a short period when you turn the key to position 0 or remove the key. Roof 99 Risk of electric shock Opening and closing G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the trim behind the overhead control panel is damaged or removed, electrical components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the trim behind the overhead control panel. RIf the trim is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CONTROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The electrical components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected by a covering behind the overhead control panel. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit has a yellow high-voltage warning sticker. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are coloured orange. MAGIC SKY CONTROL operation Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the state it was set to before the engine was switched off. X To change the degree of transparency: press button :. X At temperatures below freezing, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time. Z 100 Roof Problems with the roof Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The roof will not open or The boot separator is not closed. close. X Close the boot separator (Y page 95). The net on the boot separator is not attached. Attach the net (Y page 95). Opening and closing X The electrical plug connector on the boot separator is disconnected. X Connect the electrical plug connector to the boot separator (Y page 95). The boot is incorrectly loaded. X Only load the boot to below the boot separator The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid (Y page 85) The on-board voltage is too low. Leave the engine running. X The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has switched off automatically. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch the ignition off and then on again. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure. The automatic roof system is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 101). X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjusted. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 102) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted correctly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of X your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety notes on steering column adjustment (Y page 106). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted correctly. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 106) When adjusting the steering wheel column, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 41). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 42). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed across your hips in the pelvic area X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 108) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 111). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. Z 101 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats 102 Seats G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 43) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 54). G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints cannot be removed. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the seats electrically G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. : ; = ? A B Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle Seats RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 111). RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position (Y page 53). Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat G WARNING If the front seats are positioned too closely to the dashboard or steering wheel, the front airbags could cause additional injuries to vehicle occupants in the front. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far away as possible from the front airbags. In addition, observe the instructions on how to adjust the seats correctly. ! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the luggage net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged. You can use the seat switches on the driver's side to adjust the front-passenger seat. X To switch on/off: press button :. When the indicator lamp in button : lights up, for the front-passenger seat you can: Radjust the seat Rcall up the memory function Removing the seat belt from the seat belt guide G WARNING When driving off-road, your body is subject to forces from all directions due to the uneven surface. You could be thrown from your seat, for instance. There is a danger of injury. Always wear a seat belt, even when driving offroad. Both the driver's seat belt and the frontpassenger seat belt can be removed from the seat belt guide. This makes it easier to move the seats forward. Before you drive off, the seat belt must be inserted into the seat belt guide. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 41). X To remove: open up magnetic head ; and fold the tab up in the direction of the arrow. X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide :. X To insert: fold the tab up in the direction of the arrow. X Insert the seat belt back into the seat belt guide and fold the tab back down. Adjusting the head restraints G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i Further related subjects: 103 Seats 104 Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow. Sliding the seats forward/back Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. ! Make sure that there are no containers in the cup holder and no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. You can move the seat forwards, in order to gain better access to the rear compartment, e.g. to reach the stowage compartment in the rear . X Remove the seat belt from the seat belt guide (Y page 103). X To move the seat forwards: press : on switch :. The seat moves automatically to the foremost position. To move the seat backwards: press 9 on switch :. The seat moves back to the previous position. X To stop seat movement: press : or 9 in the opposite direction. X Adjusting the multicontour seat You can adjust the multicontour seat using COMAND Online . Adjusting the active multicontour seat You can adjust the active multicontour seat using COMAND Online . Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the 4-way lumbar support using COMAND Online . Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. Seats 105 Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch the seat heating on again. The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i If you open the roof using the key (Y page 95), the driver's seat ventilation is automatically switched on and the side windows open. Problems with the seat ventilation The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch the seat heating on again. AIRSCARF Switching on/off G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Driver's and front-passenger seat 106 Steering wheel This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the holes in the head restraints. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button :. Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds. X Press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i The blower continues running for seven seconds to cool down the heating elements. i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT RStoring feature (Y page 106) settings (Y page 111) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose Steering wheel G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rpress one of the memory function memory buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING If you use openings in the bodywork or detachable parts as steps, you could: Rslip and/or fall the vehicle and cause yourself to Rdamage fall. There is a danger of injury. Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 211). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe driver's door is closed and Ryou insert the key into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO If you close the driver's door with the key inserted in the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 111). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. 107 Mirrors 108 Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature Seats, steering wheel and mirrors If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 211). G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Mirrors Rear-view mirror Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left exterior mirror or button ; for the right exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, to the right or to the left. The exterior mirror must be set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of 10 minutes. X X Anti-dazzle mode: move anti-dazzle lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 109 Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 212): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door have been folded in manually. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. Resetting the exterior mirrors Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: manually move the exterior mirror into the correct position. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button until you hear the mirror click into place (Y page 109). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 108). Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G WARNING If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 212). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press :. Electrolyte may escape if the glass of an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: Rimmediately rinse off electrolyte from your skin with water. Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electrolyte out of eyes using clean water. Rif electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they 110 Mirrors electrolyte comes into contact with skin or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Rimmediately change out of clothing that has been in contact with electrolyte. Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rif The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. X Using the memory button Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position Using reverse gear You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not be engaged during the process. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel and the kerb should be visible in the exterior mirror. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Memory function Calling up a stored parking position 111 diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side X The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 102). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 108). X Press memory button M and then press save position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected memory position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Memory function 112 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the stored position button. X Exterior lighting Exterior lighting Light switch General notes Operation 113 For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 210). Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (Y page 210). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the key in position 0. Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set by: Rusing the light switch Rusing the combination switch (Y page 115) Rusing the on-board computer (Y page 209) When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Lights and windscreen wipers 114 Exterior lighting à is the preferred light switch position. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light RWith the engine running: if you have switched on the daytime driving lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. Here, the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 209). When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the daytime driving lights are switched off or dimmed. Dipped-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the L position, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Rear fog lamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Side lamps ! If the battery has been discharged to a low charge level, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always leave your vehicle in a safe position and adequately lit in accordance with traffic regulations. Avoid using the side lamps T for a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right X or left W parking lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Exterior lighting : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: Ran airbag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off. Intelligent Light System General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" function using the on-board computer (Y page 209). Z Lights and windscreen wipers Combination switch 115 Lights and windscreen wipers 116 Exterior lighting Active light function Extended range foglamps The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while you are driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active light function evaluates the course of the lane in which you are driving and adjusts the light in advance. The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp. Cornering light function General notes The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between dipped-beam, partial main-beam and main-beam headlamps. Partial main-beam illumination is a form of illumination whereby the main beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the main-beam. This prevents glare. If there is a vehicle in front, for example, the mainbeam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the dipped-beam headlamps. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. If the main-beam or partial main-beam headlamps are causing too much reflection from traffic signs, the lights are automatically dimmed and glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Vehicles with drive program S+ (Sport Plus): the speed at which Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches between full beam and dipped beam is increased when the drive program is switched on. Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Cornering light function with roundabout function: The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a roundabout through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by your vehicle in good time. Motorway mode Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Interior lighting G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognise road users who do have lights, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured At speeds above approximately 30 km/h: Rif no other road users are detected, the main-beam headlamps are automatically switched on Rif other road users are detected, the partial main-beam headlamps are automatically switched on The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. At speeds below approximately 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting: Rthe partial main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically Rthe main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off X X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the dipped-beam headlamps. At speeds above approximately 25 km/h: the headlamp range is automatically controlled according to the distance to other road users. Overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; c Switches the interior lighting on = | Switches the interior lighting/auto- matic interior lighting control off ? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off A Switches the automatic interior lighting con- trol on Z Lights and windscreen wipers Important safety notes 117 Windscreen wipers 118 Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time, unless the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness of the ambient lighting are set using the multimedia system (Y page 210). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on: set the switch to centre position A. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 211). Lights and windscreen wipers X glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Replacing bulbs The front and rear lamps of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop, which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î wipes the wind- screen using washer fluid If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Windscreen wipers Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to the ° position. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X X Removing the wiper blades ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always position the windscreen wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windscreen. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the bonnet. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow = beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click. X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob ; and pull the wiper blade upwards :. X Fitting the wiper blades On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers Replacing the wiper blades 119 Windscreen wipers 120 Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow : onto the wiper arm until lug ; engages. X Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow = beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again. X Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Lights and windscreen wipers X Windscreen wipers 121 Problems with the windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers fail completely. 122 Overview of climate control systems Overview of climate control systems Climate control General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Ractivate air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on "Cooling with air dehumidification" Ractivate the windscreen demisting function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when the side windows and the roof are closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather. This will speed up the cooling process, and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i It is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed in order to dry the air-conditioning system. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-conditioning system. Overview of climate control systems 123 Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone) : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I To set the temperature, left (Y page 125) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 125) To demist the windscreen (Y page 126) To switch the residual heat on/off (Y page 129) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 127) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126) To set the temperature, right (Y page 125) To switch the climate control on/off (Y page 124) To set the air distribution (Y page 126) To set the airflow (Y page 126) To set the climate mode (Y page 125) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 128) Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons on the climate control panel. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, the ñ button on the climate control panel may be used to additionally adjust the airflow (FOCUS/MEDIUM/ DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat Operating the climate control system Climate control 124 function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 136). Operating the climate control system Switching the climate control on/off General notes When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. i Switch on climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 125). Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Switching on/off To activate: press the ¿ or Á button. To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button lights up. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á button. To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Operating the climate control system 125 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivated ¿ button flashes due to a malfunction. three times or remains X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be activated. Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function only briefly. Automatic control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i When automatic mode is enabled, the climate mode can be selected (Y page 125). X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button. or X Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. X Setting the climate mode In automatic mode you can select the following climate modes: FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. X Setting the temperature Switching on/off Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Turn control : or ; anti-clockwise or clockwise. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. i If you turn controls : and ; anti-clockwise to the lowest temperature setting, airrecirculation mode may switch on automatically, depending on the outside temperature. Climate control Problem Operating the climate control system 126 Setting the air distribution Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. Climate control X Air distribution settings The air distribution can be set to the following positions: P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the adjuster in the side air vent is turned clockwise. Setting the airflow Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X To increase: press the K button. X To reduce: press the I button. side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windscreen General notes You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. Switch off the windscreen demisting function as soon as the windscreen is clear again. Switching the "Windscreen demisting" function on or off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X To switch on: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off X X or X X or X or Switching the ZONE function on/off X To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's X To switch off: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. Turn temperature control : or D anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 123). Press the K or I button. Operating the climate control system 127 Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate the à mode button. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside Switch on the windscreen wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. The rear window heating otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Climate control X Operating the climate control system 128 Problems with the rear window heating Climate control Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumhas switched off prema- ers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, switched on. interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be switched on again. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button General notes G WARNING If you activate air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from misting up. When using convenience closing, you could become trapped within the sweep of the closing window. There is a risk of injury. Monitor the entire closing procedure when using convenience closing. When closing, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the closing area. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution or at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: Rafter around five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5 † Rafter approximately five minutes if "Cooling with air dehumidification" is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 † if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated X G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W switch in the door to stop the movement of the side windows. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows are fully closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: X Release the g button. The side windows stop. X Press the W button to open or close the side windows. i Notes on the reversing feature for the side windows (Y page 90). Adjusting the air vents Switching the residual heat on/off General notes It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. Switching on/off Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 132). X To switch on: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. X i If you switch on the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To switch off: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. Residual heat is switched off automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet grille on the bonnet and in the engine compartment on the frontpassenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior i You can move the adjusters for the air vents vertically or horizontally to set the direction of the airflow. i Optimal climate control function is achieved by opening the air vents fully and setting the adjusters to the middle position. Adjusting the centre air vents Adjusting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in Z Climate control Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows are opened. The side windows move back to their original positions. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows manually after closing them using the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. X 129 Adjusting the air vents 130 To open the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : to the left. X To close the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : to the right until it engages. Climate control X Adjusting the side air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to the right or left. : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the right until it engages. X Adjusting the glove compartment air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF button (Y page 105). Driving Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). Additional notes on running in Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1500 km. ROnly briefly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm. RDrive the vehicle mainly in drive program C for the first 1500 km. After 1500 km, you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on runningin if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential: Rafter a running-in period of 3000 km Revery 50,000 km or 3 years These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake Z Driving and parking Running-in notes 131 132 Driving Driving and parking boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Key positions Key G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the vehicle i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the key: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe key must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78) Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the function of the key with KEYLESS-GO. If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is deactivated again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock Ropen doors and endanger other persons or When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 245). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. Rclimb road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Z 133 Driving and parking Driving Driving 134 Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Driving and parking Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Starting procedure with the key To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 132) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 132). The engine starts. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. X Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 211). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the shift lock released. Driving after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on automatically releasing the electrical parking brake (Y page 155). Hill start assist automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient Rthe transmission is in position N Rthe electric parking brake is applied RESP® is malfunctioning Ryou ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is switched on whenever you start the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually switched off (Y page 136) or a malfunction has caused the system to be switched off, the è or ç ECO symbol is not displayed. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the è ECO symbol is displayed in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Z Driving and parking i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds 135 136 Driving Rthe bonnet is closed driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then three subsequent stops) in succession. The ç ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is possible again. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of times that the engine can be switched off automatically is unlimited. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Driving and parking Rthe Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position D or N, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou switch to drive program S+ Ryou switch to drive program S or M (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again as soon as the è ECO symbol reappears in the multifunction display. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X To switch off: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. To switch on: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 135) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 135) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/ stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been switched off manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. X Driving 137 X or X Driving and parking Mercedes-AMG vehicles To switch off: in drive program C, press ECO button :. Switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Y page 140). Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. To switch on: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 135) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 135) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/ stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been switched off manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. X Z 138 Driving Driving and parking Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 172) or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 167). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Restart the engine again (Y page 133). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. RThere The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 296). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no display is showing more longer being cooled sufficiently. than 120 †. The coolant X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to warning lamp may also cool down. be on and a warning tone X Check the coolant level (Y page 279). Observe the warning notes may sound. as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe curve tilting function (vehicles with Active Body Control) Rthe control thresholds of ESP® If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Press DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After a short time the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the display of the multimedia system. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the quality of the available fuel. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. Available drive programs: X C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings Z Driving and parking Problem 139 Driving and parking 140 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) E Economy (vehicles with adjustable damping) Particularly economical driving characteristics CV CURVE (vehicles with Active Body Control) Particularly economical driving characteristics with cornering function Additional information for drive programs (Y page 145). Additionally, in drive program I you can configure the respective vehicle characteristics using the multimedia system. You can find information on this in the Digital Owner's Manual. If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Selecting the drive program DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) General notes Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings C Comfort Comfort-orientated, engine and transmission settings optimised for economy S Sport Sporty engine and transmission settings S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty transmission settings RACE Maximum sportiness and engine and transmission settings suitable for the racetrack Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver assistance systems Rthe availability of gliding mode Further information for automatic drive program characteristics (Y page 145). X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the display of the multimedia system. The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC SELECT controller : lights up in red. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 145). Automatic transmission Additional settings 141 cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Selector lever All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehiECO start/stop function (Y page 135) ESP® (Y page 67) Suspension (Y page 179) To permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 147) When you press buttons : - ? the corresponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC SELECT controller setting is overwritten. These settings will also be maintained if you use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change to drive program RACE, S+, S or C. If you switch to drive program I, all stored characteristics will be adopted. This is also the case if you have previously pressed buttons : - ?. : ; = ? cle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged. Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive The selector lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged. Z Driving and parking Overview of transmission positions 142 Automatic transmission Driving and parking The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. In addition to drive program ; being shown in the multifunction display, the currently selected drive program is indicated in red on the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 140). Engaging park position P All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive The selector lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. Transmission position and drive program display All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Press button :. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles : Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles : Transmission position ; Drive program When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Press button :. X Automatic transmission Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the key and remove the key Ryou switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 173) and on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 165). Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 135). X Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X Engaging drive position D When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever back past the first point of resistance. X Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rshifting Z Driving and parking Engaging park position P automatically 143 144 Automatic transmission Transmission positions Driving and parking B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 141). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always apply the electric parking brake in addition to the parking lock. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the transmission is locked. The automatic transmission shifts into P automatically: Rwhen the key is removed from the ignition lock Rwhen the engine is switched off with the transmission in position R or D and one of the doors is opened In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. C A Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary. Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission only to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Automatic transmission Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rlow fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable damping settings. Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steering curve. RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). i Select this drive program for difficult road conditions, e.g. snow and ice or wet road surfaces. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. As a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher. Rthe suspension exhibits firm damping settings. Rthe steering exhibits a sporty steering curve. provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). RESP® Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. As a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm damping settings (vehicles with adaptive adjustable damping). Rthe suspension exhibits firm damping settings (vehicles with Active Body Control). Rthe steering exhibits a sporty steering curve. RESP® emphasises the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics. This enables a more active driving style. This drive program requires more interaction from the driver. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). i Only select this drive program if the road conditions are good, e.g. the road is dry and the route ahead is clearly visible. Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe control thresholds of ESP® Information on configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Z Driving and parking Kickdown 145 146 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Vehicles with adaptive adjustable damping: drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable damping settings. Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steering curve. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (gliding mode). RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). Vehicles with Active Body Control: drive program CURVE Drive program CURVE is characterised by the following: Rincreased driving comfort on bends. Rthe vehicle tilts actively into the bend. Further information on the cornering function (Y page 176). Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rcomfortable suspension setting. Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steering curve. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (gliding mode). RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program RACE Drive program RACE is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe gearshift recommendation gives you information for slowly warming up the drive assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient driving style (Y page 147). You can follow the gearshift recommendations at all times and change gear accordingly using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. On the basis of the gearshift recommendation, using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can optimise the drive train and engine operating mode at any time. Rif you have selected a gear manually, this will be maintained until the vehicle speed significantly increases or decreases. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. As a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm damping settings. Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. RESP® switches to SPORT handling mode. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT han‐ dling mode message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the important safety notes for the SPORT handling mode (Y page 70). RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. The engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. Further information on ESP® (Y page 70). Automatic transmission Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. As a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm damping settings. Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. ECO start/stop function is available. RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). Rthe Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension Information on configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. i To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program I using the steering wheel paddles, select the M (manual) setting for the transmission. Manual gearshifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. To use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Z Driving and parking Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. As a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm damping settings. Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. RESP® provides the optimum compromise between traction and stability. Further information on ESP® (Y page 67). 147 Automatic transmission 148 Temporary setting To activate: shift the selector lever to position D. X Press button :. X X To deactivate: press button :. Driving and parking Mercedes-AMG vehicles To activate: shift the selector lever to position D. X Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;. X The temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ; and hold it in place. or X Use the lever to switch the transmission position. or X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. To activate: shift the selector lever to position D. X Press button :. X X or X To deactivate: press button :. If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT controller. Shifting gears All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Permanent setting All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to Automatic transmission Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! If manual gearshifting is permanently acti- vated, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X Gearshift recommendation All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Mercedes-AMG vehicles The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! If manual gearshifting is permanently acti- vated, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Z Driving and parking accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. 149 Automatic transmission Driving and parking 150 : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting. X Refuelling 151 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no longer changes gear. The transmission is in emergency mode. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): it is only partially possible to engage the gears, or the transmission is in position N. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. X Stop. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Z Driving and parking Problems with the transmission 152 Refuelling Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Opening the fuel filler flap Driving and parking ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 322). Refuelling General notes The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tyre pressure table Instruction label on the fuel type to be refuelled X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. : ; = ? Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Parking 153 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77). The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 79). X The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied Rthe transmission must be in position P Rthe key must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients Switching off the engine G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehiZ Driving and parking G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 immediately and remove it (Y page 132). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking 154 cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 142). X With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 132). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0 (Y page 132). X Driving and parking X The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/ stop automatic engine switch-off function. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. Applying or releasing manually Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease X the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 132) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button X Driving tips The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also applied automatically if: RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running Rthe transmission is in position D or R Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened Ryou depress the accelerator pedal If the transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou have shifted out of P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake. The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release parking brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably Z Driving and parking Applying automatically 155 156 Driving tips more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: sporty acceleration ; Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: fluctuations in speed Driving and parking Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RObserve the service intervals in the Service Booklet or in the service interval display. Have all the maintenance work carried out in accordance with Daimler AG regulations. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve fuel message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?. In addition, the 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up (Y page 249). The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. Driving tips Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. This also applies if you have activated cruise control, the limiter or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Z Driving and parking In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style involves driving at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendation Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the outer area for "Constant" will change. The ECO display summarises the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more marked changes, perform a manual reset (Y page 203). Further information on the ECO display (Y page 202). 157 158 Driving tips Driving and parking Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Always be aware of this and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during the running-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. If you regularly drive at high speeds, it is particularly important to have the brake system checked and maintained regularly. New brake pads/linings Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance and ceramic brake system (Mercedes-AMG vehicle) The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This is dependent on: Rspeed Rbraking force Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage (service life) that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rlower your speed Ravoid tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you must drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. ! Take care not to damage the sealing strip and the moulding on the side of the rear window when scraping ice off the rear window. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Further information on driving with snow chains (Y page 307). Further information on driving with summer tyres (Y page 306). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 306). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can set any road speed above 30 km/h. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for maintaining lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating may cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. Z 159 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 160 If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the stored speed. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Cruise control lever Driving and parking Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the speed Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X X : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control and variable limiter B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and the variable limiter with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp ; on: variable limiter is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. The speed is then permanently displayed in the status indicator together with the ¯ symbol. In vehicles with a segment circle in the speedometer, the segments between the currently stored speed and the end of the segment circle light up. If you have activated the permanent limiter and a speed is stored, the segments up to the stored speed light up. Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. Storing or calling up the speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Driving systems Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X i The speed indicated in the speedometer or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: apply the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® RBrake Assist intervenes Ryou shift from transmission position D. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. may differ slightly from the speed stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC General notes Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Z Driving and parking Setting a speed 161 162 Driving systems Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driving on roads with steep gradients. Driving and parking Important safety notes G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not recognise Rpeople or animals Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles vehicles or crossing traffic As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you. G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen visibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Driving systems Cruise control lever 163 Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Important safety notes Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and variable limiter C To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC You can operate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable limiter with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp = off: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. RLIM indicator lamp = on: variable limiter is selected. Selecting Distance Pilot DISTRONIC X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. Activating Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down A. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the Distance Pilot passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. The position of the accelerator pedal will determine the speed. You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h. Z Driving and parking ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the Driving systems 164 Driving and parking Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated: accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving X speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selecting the drive program All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ drive program (Y page 139). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stopstart traffic. AMG vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S, S+ or M drive program (Y page 140). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. When you select the C drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-start traffic. Changing lanes If when driving on multilane roads you wish to change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/h RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the respective turn signal RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. Road and traffic conditions Driving systems all countries. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active and you: Rapproach or drive around a roundabout Rapproach a T-junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the speed you set. The system takes into account the fact that overtaking on the right is not permitted on motorways or high-speed major roads at speeds above 80 km/h. The driving speed is adjusted to the speed of the queue of vehicles in the adjacent lane to the left. i Prevention of overtaking on the right applies to countries where traffic drives on the right. In countries where traffic drives on the left, overtaking on the left is prevented accordingly. Stopping If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Ra system fault occurs power supply is insufficient If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Rthe Setting a speed Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached or press the cruise control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function you can set the minimum distance that Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 166). The specified minimum distance can be changed when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated or deactivated. Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Z Driving and parking i The following function is not operational in 165 Driving systems 166 Driving and parking Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Cruise control lever To increase: turn control = in direction ;. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, one or more segments ; in the set speed range light up. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. X Driving systems If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The Distance Pilot off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC General notes Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the Distance Pilot off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated. Cornering, entering and exiting a bend i The last speed stored remains stored until The ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane you switch off the engine. if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Z Driving and parking Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 167 168 Driving systems Other vehicles changing lane Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them. Driving and parking Crossing vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the following situations, the vehicle could pull away unintentionally: RAt traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example. RWith a vehicle ahead on the other side of a junction and the HOLD function active. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. General notes Obstructions and stationary vehicles Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the centre of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 200 km/h. It monitors lane markings and vehicles in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windscreen. In a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h, Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Steering Pilot focuses on detected lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if detected lane markings are not present at speeds of up to 130 km/h. If these conditions are not present, Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in order for the function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the carriageway, your vehicle could come into contact with the kerb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in the lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The support offered by the system may be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present, e.g. around construction sites Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lanes Ryou switch on the turn signal Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time i After you have finished changing lanes, Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance: Ron very sharp corners Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed Pay attention also to the important safety notes on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 162). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have Z 169 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 170 Driving and parking still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot then switch to passive mode. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC remains active. Activating Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot X Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). The Steering Pilot on message appears in the multifunctional display. The Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are switched on. Information in the multifunction display If Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in grey. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for maximum permissible speeds, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 172) i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limiter can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. The limiter cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Variable speed limiter Cruise control lever Deactivating Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). The Steering Pilot off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When the Distance Pilot is deactivated or not available, Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. X Speed limiter General notes The limiter brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or Dis- tance Pilot DISTRONIC and variable limiter B To deactivate the variable limiter Driving systems Selecting the variable speed limiter X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, the variable limiter is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever is on. The variable limiter is selected. Storing the current speed Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. The current speed is stored. You will see the stored speed for five seconds in the multifunction display. Vehicles with cruise control: the stored speed is permanently displayed in the status indicator. Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the segments from the start of the scale up to the stored speed light up in the speedometer. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Setting a speed X or To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Switching the speed limiter to passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode. The following message appears in the multifunction display: Lim‐ iter passive. passive You can then exceed the stored speed. The limiter is activated again if you: Rdrive slower than the stored speed without kickdown Rset a new speed or Rcall up the last speed stored again The Limiter passive message in the multifunction display disappears. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Z Driving and parking You can operate cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable limiter with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. RLIM indicator lamp ; on: variable limiter is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. 171 172 Driving systems Switching off the speed limiter HOLD function Driving and parking General notes Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate the variable limiter: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. The variable limiter is deactivated. Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. It is not possible to deactivate the variable limiter by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent limiter If you wish to restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle for an extended period (e.g. when driving with winter tyres), the desired maximum speed can be set with the permanent limiter. You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed to a value between 160 km/h and 240 km/h(Y page 211). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message with a or %, display messages no longer appear when switching off the engine. The speed will only be displayed again once the engine has been restarted. The permanent limiter remains active even if the variable limiter is deactivated. The driven speed will remain below the stored speed even in the event of kickdown. The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 173). Driving systems You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Activating the HOLD function When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START must not be used on normal Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou depress the accelerator and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated road circuits, outside of public road use. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably highgrip road surface is required, along with the tyres and vehicle being in good condition. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tyres may get into a spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 62). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 67). i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Z Driving and parking Activation conditions 173 174 Driving systems Driving and parking Activation conditions You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed Rthe engine is running and the engine and transmission are at operating temperature. This is the case when the oil temperature gauge in the multifunction display is shown in white (Y page 213). RESP® is functioning correctly (Y page 67) Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected (Y page 140) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Activating RACE START i When manual mode (Y page 147) is active, the transmission automatically shifts up to RACE START in the drive program. This function supports maximum acceleration with RACE START. After going through an accelerating process once from a stationary position, this function is automatically deactivated. X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel gearshift paddles. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel gearshift paddles. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Man‐ ual message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 147). or X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 147). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is cancel- led. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed increases. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not pos‐ sible See Owner's Manual or RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. Adaptive Damping System General notes Suspension with the adaptive adjustable damping provides improved driving comfort and continuously controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface conditions Rthe selected drive program (Y page 139). Driving systems In the Comfort and Economy drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select one of these drive programs if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also select these drive programs when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeatedly until the Comfort or Economy drive program is selected. Selecting Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Sport drive program is selected. Selecting Sport Plus mode The firmer suspension settings in the Sport Plus drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads or, ideally, when driving on closed race circuits. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Sport Plus drive program is selected. Activating the driving dynamics display Using the driving dynamics display in the multimedia system display, you can see the drive program you selected as well as additional information on the vehicle's operating state. X Switch on the multimedia system. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. X Press button : . The driving dynamics display appears in the multimedia system display. The following information on the vehicle's operating status is displayed in the driving dynamics display: RDrive program selected (Y page 139) RAccelerator pedal position shown in % RBrake pedal position shown in % RSteering angle RDamping setting selected RG-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal and lateral acceleration (only available in Sport or Sport Plus drive programs) Active Body Control ABC (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Setting the vehicle level General notes The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 139) or the level button. The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. In order to reduce fuel consumption and improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is lowered as its speed increases. In the Sport and Sport Plus drive programs, it is lowered by up to Z Driving and parking Selecting the Comfort or Economy drive programs 175 176 Driving systems Driving and parking 13 mm compared to the normal vehicle level. In the Comfort and CURVE drive programs, it is lowered by up to 5 mm compared to the normal vehicle level. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised to the set vehicle height. Select the normal level for normal road surfaces and the raised level for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Setting the raised level Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: Rhave selected the SPORT suspension tuning at normal level and Rswitch off the engine Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you switch off the engine. ! When the engine is switched off, the vehicle is lowered if SPORT suspension tuning has been selected at the normal level. The vehicle is automatically lowered by approximately 10 mm. Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X Make sure that a speed of 120 km/h is not exceeded. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. If the engine has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 50 mm. X Setting the normal level Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rdrive faster than approximately 120 km/h Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h Ror switch to the drive program while the vehicle is in motion. X Suspension settings General notes The electro-hydraulically controlled suspension features improved driving dynamics, driving safety and ride comfort. You can also choose between a sporty, a particularly sporty, a comfortable and a comfortable mode with cornering function (CURVE). Driving systems Selecting Comfort mode In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Comfort drive program is selected. Selecting the CURVE setting In the CURVE drive program, the curve tilting function is activated. The vehicle inclines inwards by up to 2.65 degrees on bends. The tilt function and the comfort suspension tuning increase driving comfort in corners. CURVE is available in the speed range between 15 km/h and 180 km/h. Select this mode on winding roads in particular. Outside this speed range, the CURVE drive program is the same as the Comfort drive program. The curve tilting function monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera attached at the top of the windscreen. This function is automatically active if you select the CURVE drive program. The system is operational at speeds of up to 180 km/h. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the CURVE drive program is selected. The system is deactivated if you select a different drive program. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rif you are driving slower than 15 km/h or faster than 180 km/h. Rif the vehicle is fully laden. Rif you drive with very high lateral acceleration. Activating the driving dynamics display Selecting Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension setting. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Sport drive program is selected. Selecting Sport Plus mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport Plus drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension setting. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the Sport Plus drive program is selected. Using the driving dynamics display in the multimedia system display, you can see the drive program you selected as well as additional information on the vehicle's operating state. Z Driving and parking The suspension is continuously tuned to each wheel individually and depends on: Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Rthe vehicle load Rthe drive program selected If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the Comfort drive program is activated when the engine is next started. 177 Driving systems 178 Switch on the multimedia system. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. X Press button : . The driving dynamics display appears in the multimedia system display. The following information on the vehicle's operating status is displayed in the driving dynamics display: RDrive program selected (Y page 139) RAccelerator pedal position shown in % RBrake pedal position shown in % RSteering angle RActivity of the ABC spring struts RVehicle level display (Y page 175) RLevel settings animation RG-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal and lateral acceleration (only available in Sport or Sport Plus drive programs) Driving and parking X Active Body Control ABC (MercedesAMG vehicles) Important safety notes The vehicle is slightly lowered when the engine is switched off. G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. ! If you have selected the normal level and switched the engine off, the vehicle is lowered. The vehicle is automatically lowered by approximately 10 mm. Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Setting the raised level Setting the vehicle level General notes The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 140) or the on-board computer (Y page 178). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. In order to reduce fuel consumption and improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is lowered as its speed increases. In the Sport and Sport Plus drive programs it is lowered by up to 13 mm, and in the Comfort drive program by up to 5 mm compared to the normal vehicle level. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised to the set vehicle height. If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the Comfort drive program is activated when the engine is next started. Select the normal level for normal road surfaces and the raised level for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X Make sure that a speed of 120 km/h is not exceeded. X If symbol ; is not shown: press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Vehicle level. level X Press the a button. The following message appears: : Vehicle level Raise with OK. OK X Press the a button. If the engine has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted. X Driving systems Adjusting to normal level Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected setting is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the comfortable setting is activated when the engine is next started. Driving and parking Symbol ; appears. The vehicle height is adjusted to the raised level. Selecting the sporty setting Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X If symbol ; is shown: press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Vehicle level. level X Press the a button. The following message appears: : Vehicle level Lower with OK. OK X Press the a button. Symbol ; is faded out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rdrive faster than approximately 120 km/h. Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h. Ror switch to the drive program while the vehicle is in motion. X The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension setting. X Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The sports suspension setting is selected. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Selecting the comfort setting Suspension settings General notes The electro-hydraulically controlled suspension features improved driving dynamics, driving safety and ride comfort. You can also choose between a particularly sporty or a comfortable tuning. The suspension is continuously adjusted for each wheel individually and depends on: Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Rthe vehicle load Rthe drive program selected 179 In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this Z Driving and parking 180 Driving systems mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. X Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The comfortable suspension setting is selected. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Activating the driving dynamics display in the COMAND display Using the driving dynamics display in the multimedia system display, you can see the drive program you selected as well as additional information on the vehicle's operating status. X Switch on COMAND Online. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. The following information on the vehicle's operating status is displayed in the driving dynamics display: RDrive program selected (Y page 140) RAccelerator pedal position shown in % RBrake pedal position shown in % RSteering angle RVehicle level display (Y page 178) RActivity of the ABC spring struts RLevel settings animation RG-FORCE cross to display longitudinal and lateral acceleration (only available in Sport, Sport Plus and RACE drive programs) ROverrun mode animation there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left- hand side The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Driving systems Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 285). 181 Warning displays Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the cover behind the seats in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission posi- Warning display tion D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas activated rolling backwards P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. Z Driving and parking range Driving and parking 182 Driving systems From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 183 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified speing displays are lit. You cialist workshop. also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 285). ing displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultraimately five seconds. sound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention can assist you during manoeuvring and parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 180). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rparking or stopping restrictions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly Z Driving and parking Problem 184 Driving systems Driving and parking Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 181) warning messages during the parking procedure Rat any time, you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces that are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb Ryou forward park Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If objects are located above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer into the parking space too soon. As a result, you could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop the vehicle and switch Active Parking Assist off. For further information on the detection range (Y page 180). : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will Driving systems Parking G WARNING Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. There is a risk of accident if you do not apply the brakes yourself. Always apply the brakes yourself when parking and manoeuvring. Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed X below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible Z Driving and parking need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. 185 186 Driving systems parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Driving and parking Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can assist you when exiting the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A kerb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is manoeuvred into the parking space. Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: message appears in the multifunction display %. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to the message while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example, when you recognise that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Cancelling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 182). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol goes out and the Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems Reversing camera General notes Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 285) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). For technical reasons, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chassis. Activating/deactivating the reversing camera To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Owner's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines. The image from the reversing camera is available throughout the manoeuvring process. To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. X Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. i The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the multimedia system. Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Displays in the multimedia system The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the handle on the boot lid ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Rthe Z Driving and parking When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. 187 188 Driving systems Driving and parking Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 181), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system. "Reverse parking" function Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Driving systems Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 187). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. 189 Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 187). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking X Driving systems 190 ATTENTION ASSIST Driving and parking General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at the end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. 180° view : Symbol for the 180° view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the reversing camera to select a 180° view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 181), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed The evaluation of your attention level is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Driving systems Displaying the attention level 191 corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 207) of the on-board computer. X Select the assistance graphic display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 207). The following information is displayed: Rthe length of the journey since the last break Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h. Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 208). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display when the engine is running. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been switched off. The sensitivity selected If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with COMAND Online: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND Online. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND Online. Traffic Sign Assist General notes X Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted and overtaking restrictions to the driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction triggers a warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with camera system : attached behind the top Z Driving and parking Warning in the multifunction display Driving and parking 192 Driving systems of the windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are also used to determine the current speed limit. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits and overtaking restrictions is updated. The display can also be updated without a visible traffic sign if: Rthe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway exit or slip road) Ra village or town boundary is passed which is stored in the digital map Rthe last traffic sign detected by the camera has not been repeated If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the sign is displayed for five seconds. The currently applicable traffic regulation continues to be shown in the assistance graphic display. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if: Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rthere is dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the vicinity of the camera Rtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice, snow) Rthe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night Rsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes) Rthe information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date Switching the message function on/off If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist display in the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) are displayed in the instrument cluster for five seconds respectively. The wrong-way warning and the traffic sign display for speed limits and overtaking restrictions remain active even when the display has been deactivated. X Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist message function via the on-board computer (Y page 207). Instrument cluster display Showing the assistance graphic Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster. X Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 207). Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits and overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. Driving systems Speed limit with unknown restriction 193 Active Blind Spot Assist : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. No entry (wrong-way warning) Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaking If no entry signs are passed, a warning message is displayed in the instrument cluster should Traffic Sign Assist detect that you are driving in the wrong direction. You will then also hear a warning tone. You should immediately check your direction of travel in order to avoid danger to yourself and other road users. i This function is not available in all countries. too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rif the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Radar sensors Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 161), Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot, Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 195). The radar sensors for Active Blind Spot Assist are integrated in the rear bumper and in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and radiator trim are free from dirt, ice and slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer function properly. Z Driving and parking General notes Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not directly visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning light in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of side impact is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. 194 Driving systems Monitoring range Driving and parking G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of vehicles may be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- Driving systems Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds Ryou clearly brake or accelerate Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake RESP® is deactivated Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected Activating Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated (Y page 208). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Active Lane Keeping Assist If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or depress the accelerator pedal more firmly. The course-correcting brake application is available within a speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side General notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windscreen. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and Z Driving and parking ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. 195 Driving and parking 196 Driving systems can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available within a speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no lane markings or several unclear lane markings, e.g. around construction sites Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings Warning vibration through the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway Rthe system detects solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou cut the corner on a bend Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate Driving systems If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is intended to help you return the vehicle to the original lane. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognised as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be detected. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Ryou have switched on the turn signal Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration RESP® is deactivated Rthe transmission is not in position D Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in which you are driving Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction Ryou switch on the turn signal Ryou clearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Rlane markings are no longer detected Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Stand‐ ard or Adaptive (Y page 208). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (Y page 207) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Z Driving and parking brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. 197 198 Driving systems Ryou brake hard. steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Driving and parking Ryou Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument cluster illustration (Y page 32). Displays and operation X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or anti-clockwise. If you turn the light switch (Y page 113) to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambient light. The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 159): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable speed limiter is activated (Y page 170): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated (Y page 161): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the measured air temperature and not the road surface temperature. Z 199 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 200 Displays and operation The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 201). A change in the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display after a delay. Operating the on-board computer Overview Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32). Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Displays and operation 9 : Press and hold: a RConfirms % Press briefly: Multifunction display the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open the selection or display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RBack off LINGUATRONIC RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used the telephone book/redial memory RExits Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects 6 RMakes W X RAdjusts 8 RMute ? RSwitches or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches the volume on LINGUATRONIC Further information on LINGUATRONIC is available in the separate operating instructions. Drive program (Y page 142) Transmission position (Y page 142) Text field Menu bar Time Outside temperature or speed (Y page 209) Set the time using the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). X To display menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. Possible displays in the multifunction display: : ; = ? A B RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 149) Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 183) R¯ Cruise control (Y page 159) RÈ Speed limiter (Y page 170) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (Y page 116) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 135) Rë HOLD function (Y page 172) Ra Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 161) R120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Z On-board computer and displays RIn RSwitches % 201 Menus and submenus 202 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 200). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 202) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 203) RAudio menu (Y page 204) menu (telephone) (Y page 205) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 207) RServ. menu (service) (Y page 208) RSettings menu (Y page 208) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 213) RTel Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; appears. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" : Distance ; Driving time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 203). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From start: start Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From reset. reset ECO display The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 156). Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays approximate range :. Menus and submenus Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. A gearshift recommendation Z may also appear in the display. Observe the information on gearshift recommendation when shifting manually (Y page 149). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display. X Resetting values Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a to confirm your selection. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter R"From start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions The multifunction display shows navigation instructions in the Navi menu. Observe the additional information on navigation in the separate operating instructions for the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced X : ; = ? Distance to the destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" Z On-board computer and displays Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. X 203 On-board computer and displays 204 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see change-of-direction symbol = and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual RNew route... or Calculating route... A new route is calculated. RRoad not mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognised, e.g. new roads, car parks or private land. RNo route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station distance display = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. : Active station list ; Station with preset position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Menus and submenus DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Audio player or audio media operation Audio files from various audio players or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system and select audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : appears. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio players or media support this function. If track information is saved on the audio player or media, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. Video DVD operation Switch on the multimedia system and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. X TV operation The preset position is only displayed along with channel : if this has been stored. You can save channels in the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system and select TV (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a saved channel: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, radio stations can also be received. The multifunction display shows TV (Radio). (Radio) Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the Z On-board computer and displays To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. X 205 Menus and submenus 206 On-board computer and displays surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system (Y page 253). X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 268). or X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system (Y page 256). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Rat any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time irrespective of the selected menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end an incoming call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorise access to the phone book on the phone. X Press : or 9 to select the names one after the other. or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 for longer than one second. The names in the phone book are displayed quickly one after the other. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. Menus and submenus RActive Assistance menu Depending on your vehicle's equipment, in the Assist. menu, you have the following options: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 207) RMercedes-AMG vehicles: setting the vehicle level (Y page 178) RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign Assist message function (Y page 207) RActivating/deactivating Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 207) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist (Y page 207) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 207) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 208) RActivating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 208) RActivating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 208) Showing the assistance graphic Brake Assist (Y page 64) with cross-traffic func- RActive Brake Assist tion (Y page 72) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 190) Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 195) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. RActive Traffic Sign Assist In the Traffic Sign Assist menu, you can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message function on or off. When the message function is activated, detected traffic signs and information appear in the multifunction display for five seconds. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Traffic Sign Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate the message function: press a again. Further information on Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 191). Activating/deactivating Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Steering Pilot. Pilot X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are activated, the multifunction display shows the Steering Pilot On message. Further information on Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 168). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assist. graphic. graphic X Press a to confirm your selection. The multifunction display shows the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display. The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from other driving systems or driving safety systems: RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 191) RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 161) X Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist You can use this function to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist. Z On-board computer and displays Introduction 207 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 208 You can use the function to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package, to activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brake Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. If Active Brake Assist or Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display of the multifunction display. Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 64). Further information on Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 72). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193). Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm your selection. The current selection appears. X Press a again. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 195). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Further information on ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 190). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages (Y page 216) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 309) RChecking the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 309) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 281) Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Introduction X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm your selection. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X Service menu Settings menu Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, in the Settings menu you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 209) RChanging the light settings (Y page 209) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 211) RChanging the convenience settings (Y page 211) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 212) Menus and submenus Lights Selecting the distance unit Setting the daytime driving lights The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. The current setting km or miles appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. The Daytime driving lights function can only be switched on with the engine switched off. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime driving lights function. If the Daytime driving lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to the: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu Rtotal distance recorder and trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control Rspeed limiter RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC RASSYST PLUS service interval display Selecting permanent display United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display: function. The current setting, outside temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]:, [mph]: appears. X To change the setting: press a again. Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 113). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function. If the Intell. Light System function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and the L symbol in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X When you activate the Intell. Light System System, you activate the following functions: RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function RExtended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Light submenu (Y page 210). This display message will only appear if the setting for driving on the Z On-board computer and displays Instrument cluster 209 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 210 left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version. Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 115). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 113). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. The current setting Right-side traffic or Left-side traffic appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. These are only deactivated if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version. A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/ right. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. The current setting appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Setting the ambient lighting colour Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light col. function. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set the colour to SOLAR SOLAR, SOLAR orange or SOLAR red. red X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Surround lighting function. If the Surround lighting function is activated, the multifunction display shows the light cone and the area around the vehicle in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround lighting function and you turn the light switch to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 113). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all Menus and submenus Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.-off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lighting delayed sw.-off function. When the Lighting delayed sw.-off function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting the permanent speed limiter Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. The current setting appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the permanent speed limiter in increments of ten (160 160 km/h to 240 km/h). km/h The Off setting switches the permanent speed limiter off. X Press the a button to store the entry. X Further information on the permanent speed limiter (Y page 172). Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 15 km/h. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door locks function. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the multifunction display shows the left-hand vehicle door in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the automatic locking feature (Y page 84). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Comfort Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has Z On-board computer and displays the doors and the boot lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rside lamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Rdaytime driving lights Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors 211 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 212 any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/ Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the multifunction display shows the steering wheel in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 106). Switching belt adjustment on/off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on belt adjustment (Y page 43). Switching the fold mirrors in when locking function on/off This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function. When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐ rors function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 109), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold-in mirrors function. If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. Yes X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres): function of the permanent speed limiter can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights function in the Lights submenu, you must turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Warm-up : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission oil temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP SETUP displays the following information, functions and settings: Rthe digital speedometer Rthe gear indicator Rthe engine mode Rthe suspension mode Rthe transmission position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. RACETIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Displaying the intermediate time : ; = ? Engine mode C, S, S+ or M Suspension setting SPORT or COMFORT Transmission position D/MM ESP® mode (On On/Off Off) Z 213 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus 214 Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is shown for five seconds. On-board computer and displays X Deleting all laps Starting a new lap : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation X X Press the % button on the steering wheel. Confirm Yes with a. The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap Stop the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X X : ; = ? A RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed If you store at least one lap and stop the RACETIMER, an overall evaluation will then be available. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. Menus and submenus 215 : ; = ? A On-board computer and displays Lap evaluation Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Z Display messages 216 Display messages On-board computer and displays Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 172) RParking (Y page 153) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display fades the display message out. High-priority display messages are shown by the multifunction display in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, these display messages are deleted as well. Display messages 217 Safety systems Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily unavailable. currently unavaila‐ Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. ble See Owner's Man‐ In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the ual instrument cluster. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. !÷ ABS and ESP® are faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. inoperative See Own‐ In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in er's Manual the instrument cluster. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 218 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. currently unavaila‐ ble See Owner's Man‐ In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ual The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X ÷ ESP® is faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. inoperative See Own‐ In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instruer's Manual ment cluster. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the inoperative See Own‐ instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. er's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Key: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. ! The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 154). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 154). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 219 220 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch the ignition off and then on again. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 154). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch the ignition off and then on again. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch the ignition off and then on again. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 313). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 313). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 154). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ! Parking brake inop‐ erative The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 221 On-board computer and displays 222 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the Mercedes connect me system are malfunctioned. X Have the Mercedes connect me system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual Important PRE-SAFE® functions have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Restart the engine. Check brake pad wear Inoperative Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function and PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are functional again. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Restart the engine. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 70). Act. Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is not available due to a fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 224 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: Rdirt on sensors Rheavy rain or snow Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RActive Brake Assist RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC RSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RPRE-SAFE® PLUS If the front radar sensor system is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and driving safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 285). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. A The roll bars are faulty. Malfunction Consult workshop 6 Restraint sys. mal‐ function Consult workshop G WARNING The roll bars will then possibly not be extended in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about the restraint system (Y page 40). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shoporFront shop Front right malfunction Consult workshop 6 Left windowbag mal‐ function Consult workshoporRight workshop Right windowbag malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The left or right headbag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right headbag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 226 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger kneebag are disabled during the journey, although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. G WARNING The front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of the vehicle. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 46) Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 46). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger kneebag are enabled during the journey, although: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. G WARNING The airbag may deploy unintentionally. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure there are no objects applying additional force to the seat. The system may otherwise detect the additional force and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 46) Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Display messages 228 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 46). Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The corresponding bulb is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 118). LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Left dipped beam (Example) Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual X The exterior lighting is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The light sensor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoper‐ ative Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Switch off lights Display messages 229 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 279). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off X G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge, observing the warning notes (Y page 279). X If the temperature increases again, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 230 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics See Owner's Manual ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X # The battery is no longer being charged and the charge status is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. 4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 278). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 278). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. Add 1 litre engine oil when next refu‐ elling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 278). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 278). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 278). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 278). Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off 8 Reserve fuel level C The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Refuel at the nearest filling station. X There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. G WARNING The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ABC Malfunction Stop Vehicle The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears. The vehicle is leaking oil. The multifunction display continuously shows the display message. G WARNING The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 231 On-board computer and displays Display messages 232 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning. The multifunction display continuously shows the display message. G WARNING The suspension settings are thus affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. À Attention Assist: Take a break! À Attention Assist inoperative Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. currently unavaila‐ Possible causes: ble See Owner's Man‐ RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. ual RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist inoperative ë Off Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Keeping Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Assist currently Possible causes: unavailable See Own‐ RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. er's Manual RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period. RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Clean the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Active Blind Spot Assist currently Possible causes: unavailable See Own‐ RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature er's Manual range. RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Clean the sensors (Y page 285). X Restart the engine. Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Pilot can‐ celled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 233 234 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use the Parking Pilot again later (Y page 183). Parking Pilot inop‐ erative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 183). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Pilot is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Pilot ended The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Distance Pilot off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 161). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. Distance Pilot available again Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 161). Distance Pilot cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are also temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Restart the engine. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Distance Pilot inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is faulty. erative The following may have also failed: RBrake Assist with cross-traffic function RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function RSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Distance Pilot pas‐ sive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot - - km/h A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met. X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 161). Distance Pilot and Limiter inoperative Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and speed limiter are faulty. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are therefore also unavailable. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Steering Pilot cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period. RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Clean the windscreen. Steering Pilot inop‐ Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty. erative However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Limiter passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the speed limiter is switched to passive mode (Y page 171). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 235 On-board computer and displays 236 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Speed limit (winter tyres) - - - km/h You have reached the stored speed limit for winter tyres. Exceeding this speed is not possible. You can block the message from being displayed by pressing the a button. The message only appears again when you next switch on the ignition. Cruise control off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (Y page 159). Cruise control - - km/h Cruise control cannot be activated since not all of the activation conditions have been met. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 159). Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Cruise control and speed limiter are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. 120 km/h Maximum speed excee‐ In addition, display ð appears in the multifunction display. ded X Drive more slowly. Display messages 237 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres RThe tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 289). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 309). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative Rectify tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 309). The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 311). Z On-board computer and displays Tyres 238 Display messages Display messages On-board computer and displays Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 289). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Caution, tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 289). Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila‐ ble No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong RF interference. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start the engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Apply brake to dese‐ You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posilect Park (P) posi‐ tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. tion X Depress the brake pedal. To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine. Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open transmission not in P The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X When parking the vehicle, shift the transmission to position P. Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 240 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Apply brake to select R You attempted to shift from position D to position R. X Depress the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position R. Without changing gear, consult work‐ shop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Reversing not poss. Consult workshop You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction. The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components. A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cool‐ ing The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Close the bonnet. Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual C Ð Power steering mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all doors. X The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. J The boot separator is open. The boot is loaded too high and the load is preventing automatic closClose boot separator ing of the boot separator. X Stow the load such that the boot separator can close unhindered and is not pushed upwards. X Close the boot separator (Y page 95). * Close centre com‐ partment The stowage space under the armrest is open. The interior motion sensor is not primed. X Close the stowage space under the armrest (Y page 262). Telephone No service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 242 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions K You attempted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the roof (Y page 94). K The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressurised. X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 94). Decrease speed Vario-roof lowering K Open/close varioroof completely K Start engine See Owner's Manual X The roof is not locked. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed (Y page 94). X The on-board voltage is too low. Start the engine. X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 94). X The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch the ignition off and then on again. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 94). Close rear side win‐ You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open. dows X Close the side windows (Y page 91). ¥ Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 280). Wiper malfunction‐ ing The windscreen wipers are defective. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ ing The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 243 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key The key needs to be replaced. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X  The key battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 80).  The key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Locate the key. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Change key batteries Key not detected (red display message) Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.  Key not detected (white display message) The key is currently undetected. Change the location of the key in the vehicle. X If the key still cannot be detected: Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X  The key is continually undetected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning Remove starting but‐ tone also sounds. ton, then insert key X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Key 244 Warning and indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Several warning and indicator lamps can thereby temporarily light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after the engine is started or during a journey. Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps 245 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. G WARNING The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 246 Warning and indicator lamps Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is faulty. An additional warning tone indicates that EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. J÷ å! N The red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 70) it may be better to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67). ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP® is faulty. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting braking applications. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 70) it may be better to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 248 Warning and indicator lamps Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 70). ! N The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the restraint system checked. For further information on the restraint system, see (Y page 40). Warning and indicator lamps 249 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a fault, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp is on while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 250 Warning and indicator lamps Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 279). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 279). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. Warning and indicator lamps N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. X Increase the distance. · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 161). Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 64). Further information on Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 72). Z On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp 251 252 Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays Tyres Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 289). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 309). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rthe h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Operating system The multimedia system section in this manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and give way signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect driving recommendations if the actual road/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Operating system Overview General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. If necessary, the display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the q control knob. Z Multimedia system General notes 253 Operating system 254 Adjusting the volume Back button Turn the q control knob. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. X Switching the sound on/off Press the 8 button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation messages will be heard even if the sound is muted. Multimedia system X Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND Online: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RVehicle functions with system settings RFavourites functions Favourites Calling up and exiting favourites To call up: press the ò button on the controller. X Select a favourite, e. g. Vehicle Vehicle. The favourites are displayed. X To exit: press the ò button again. X Adding favourites Adding a predefined favourite Controller The controller in the centre console lets you: menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 Rselect : ; = ? To add a new favourite To rename a selected favourite To move a selected favourite To delete a selected favourite Press the ò button. Slide 6 the controller. The menu bar is shown. X Select Reassign Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favourites are displayed. X X Operating system X Select a favourite. Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Adding your own favourite Select Vehicle VehicleQClimate Climate control. control Press and hold the ò button until the favourites are displayed. X Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Correct functioning of the navigation system depends, amongst other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or multi-storey car parks. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND Online. Further information can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map displays the current vehicle position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Options OptionsQRoute Route settings. settings Notes for route types: X REco route route Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account. RDynamic route only after request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be taken into account for route calculation. RCalculate alternative routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start Start, select the menu item Continue Continue. Notes for route options: RDynamic RUse toll roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse vignette roads (not available in all countries) The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network, e. g. 10 days or 1 year. Entering an address Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map displays the current vehicle position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Destination DestinationQAddress Address entry. entry Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rtown or postcode, street, house number Rcountry, town or postcode Rtown or postcode, centre Rstreet, town or postcode, junction X Select Town Town. The town in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Z Multimedia system X 255 Operating system 256 Enter the town. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide 5 the controller. X Select the location. If available, the postcode is shown. If there are different postcodes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. Multimedia system X Rsearch for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect travel guide destination (only available for selected European countries) Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Yes or Set as intermediate des‐ tination. tination Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as intermediate destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing Connecting the mobile phone Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System set‐ tingsQActivate tings Activate Bluetooth. Bluetooth X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mails i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect Searching for and authorising (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorise (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorisation takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automati- Operating system Select Tel/ Tel/®QConnect Connect device Search for phones deviceQSearch phonesQStart Start search. search The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list X Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorised. Ñ Mobile phone is authorised, but is not connected. # Mobile phone is authorised and connected. Connecting the mobile phone Authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select the mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm the code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is cancelled. Repeat authorisation. Authorisation by entering a passkey (passcode): Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one- to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X i Mobile phones that are connected to the optionally available telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) are displayed separately in the device list. These are found below the entry MB SAP module phones. phones Switching between mobile phones If you have authorised more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X X Select Connect device. device Select a mobile phone from the device list. Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Introduction The module can be used as a permanently installed telephone with its own SIM card (Y page 258) or in conjunction with a mobile phone (Y page 259). If you wish to use the module in conjunction with your mobile telephone, the mobile phone must support the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile). The following functions are available using the module: Rhands-free mode Rdata modem mode (Y page 259) Rsending and receiving text messages (Y page 260) Z Multimedia system cally after authorisation. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Owner's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: 257 258 Operating system Raccess to the phone book of the mobile phone (if supported by the mobile phone) (Y page 259) Rcharging a mobile phone via the USB connection (Y page 260) Activating and connecting the module i The module is not available in all vehicles, depending on the equipment. Multimedia system Installing the module Multimedia system: Select Tel/ Tel/® . Module: install (Y page 258). X Press and hold button ;. X As soon as indicator lamp : starts flashing yellow, release the button. The indicator lamp continues to flash yellow. X X Mounting the module in the stowage compartment of the centre console X Slide module ; into bracket : until it audibly engages. Connecting the module using a USB cable (COMAND Online) Multimedia system: Select Connect deviceQConnect device Connect MB SAP moduleQStart module Start search. search The module is searched for and connected. X To authorise a mobile phone: select Start search and follow the instructions of the multimedia system. Further information on authorising and connecting mobile phones (Y page 256). X SIM card mode Inserting a SIM card Mounting the module in the stowage compartment of the centre console X Insert USB cable : into the module. X Slide the module into the bracket until it audibly engages. X Connect the USB cable to the USB port. X With the contact surface facing down, insert SIM card : into the SIM card slot until it engages. After a SIM card is inserted in the module, a Bluetooth® connection with another mobile Operating system Connecting the mobile phone General notes Before using your mobile phone with the module and the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorise it. Requirements The mobile phone can be authorised and connected to the module if: Rthe module is installed (Y page 258) and activated in the multimedia system (Y page 258) Rno SIM card is inserted in the module Rthe mobile phone has no active Bluetooth® connection to another device Rthe mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile) Depending on the type of mobile phone, different settings must be changed on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). RBluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices Rthe Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile of the mobile phone must be activated Switching between mobile phones If you have authorised more than one mobile phone on the module, you can switch between the individual phones. X Select the mobile phone under MB SAP mod‐ ule phones. phones X Confirm the connection request (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm. Data modem mode X or Connect the mobile phone to the module (Y page 259). Insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot on the module (Y page 258). X Before connecting for the first time, enable the module for Internet access and select the network provider in the multimedia system (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Use as a data modem is automatically activated. X Activate/deactivate data roaming (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). For further information on data mode without telephony with COMAND Online (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Settings Authorising and connecting a mobile phone Storing/deleting the SIM card PIN Multimedia system: Select Connect device deviceQMB MB SAP module phones X Highlight the mobile phone. X To select G: navigate to the right. X Activate O or deactivate ªStore Store PIN. PIN Select Connect deviceQSearch device Search for phonesQSAP phones SAP phoneQStart phone Start searchQMB search MB SAP module phones X Select the mobile phone. X Enter and confirm any 16-digit PIN. X Enter and confirm the same PIN on the mobile phone. X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm. i Please observe the messages in the mobile phone. If necessary, you will be asked to confirm further profile requests. X Multimedia system: X Transferring the phone book In order to use the phone book of the mobile phone via the multimedia system, the phone book must be transferred using the module. The transfer of data may take up to ten minutes. Transmission occurs automatically after a Bluetooth® connection is automatically established. Z Multimedia system phone is no longer possible. Any existing Bluetooth® connection is ended upon SIM card insertion. 259 Operating system 260 Text messages The following external media sources can be used: Requirements The module is connected with the mobile phone (Y page 259) or is being used in the SIM card mode (Y page 258). Multimedia system Activating/deactivating text message downloading from the mobile phone Dial number Function 00080 Text message downloading is deactivated. 00081 Text message downloading is activated. RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RCD RDVD (COMAND Online) RSD cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on the single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Owner's Manual). Using the device list Multimedia system: Select Media MediaQDevices Devices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played back. X For further information on receiving text messages when using the telephone module (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Charging a mobile phone Inserting/removing SD memory card Important safety notes Slide cover ; on the module in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X Connect the mobile phone with a USB data cable to USB socket :. X Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Owner's Manual). G WARNING SD memory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. ! If you are no longer using the SD memory card, you should remove it and take it out of the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD memory card The SD card slot is on the control panel. X Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot until it engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. Ejecting an SD memory card Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected. X Remove the memory card. X Operating system 261 Connecting USB devices Multimedia system There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 260). Z Stowage areas 262 Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes Stowing and features G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. X To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it to position 1. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest Glove compartment X To open: press button :. Armrest ; folds out. There is a stowage tray and a mobile phone bracket the stowage compartment. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. In the glove compartment, there is a coin holder, a map holder and a pen holder. X i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 130). port and a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 Player . Stowage areas X To open: press marking :. Spectacles compartment ; opens. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the centre console Umbrella holder Example: left side of the vehicle There are umbrella holders in the door stowage compartments on both sides of the vehicle. One compact umbrella can be stowed per side. X To remove: take hold of strap ; and pull umbrella holder : out of the stowage compartment in the direction of the arrow. X To insert: push umbrella holder : in the opposite direction to the arrow and into the stowage compartment until it engages. You can remove the umbrella holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Stowage compartment in the rear centre console To open: briefly press the trim of cover :. To remove the rubber mat: grip the rubber mat by its tabs and pull it upwards. X To insert the rubber mat: push the rubber mat into the casing. X To close: fold cover : downwards until it engages. You can remove the rubber mat for the stowage compartment to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the stowage compartment for the centre console contains a cup holder and an ashtray. X X To open: slide cover : in the direction of the arrow. On vehicles equipped with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is fitted in the stowage compartment (Y page 287). On vehicles equipped with a bottle holder, the bottle holder is located in the stowage compartment (Y page 267). X Z Stowing and features Spectacles compartment 263 264 Stowage areas Stowage compartment in the rear compartment Loading aid in the boot Raising/lowering the roof Stowing and features G WARNING Body parts can become trapped when the roof is being raised or lowered. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of moving parts. Press the switch again if someone becomes trapped. Only the left side of the vehicle features a rear stowage compartment. X Open the seat belt guide and remove the seat belt (Y page 103). X Move the left-hand front seat forwards (Y page 104) and fold the seat backrest forwards. X To open: press release button ;. Cover : folds upwards. X To close: fold down cover : and let it engage. X Fold back the seat backrest of the left-hand front seat and move the seat back (Y page 104). X Insert the seat belt back into the seat belt guide. Stowage net ! Only close the boot once the roof is lowered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. To make it easier to load your luggage, you can raise the stowed roof after you have opened the boot lid. You can only raise roof ; when the boot lid is fully open. X To raise the roof: press switch :. Roof ; is raised slightly and boot separator = moves to the open position. Switch : lights up brightly. X There is a stowage net : in the front-passenger footwell. To lower the roof: press switch :. The boot separator moves to the closed position and roof ; lowers slightly. Switch : lights up dimly. Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature: when the boot lid is opened, the loading aid rises automatically. It lowers automatically when the boot lid is closed. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO and HANDSFREE ACCESS: when the boot lid is opened, the loading aid rises automatically. When the roof is closed, the boot separator remains in the open position. The boot separator moves Stowage areas 265 Stowing and features to the closed position automatically when the roof is lowered. Z Features 266 Problems with the loading aid Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions It is no longer possible to You cannot close the boot any more. lower the stowed roof in X Call a qualified specialist workshop. the boot using the loading aid. Stowing and features Stowage well under the boot floor RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the centre console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the centre console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight. To open: open boot separator ; (Y page 95). X Swing boot floor = upwards using loop :. X The TIREFIT kit, tyre-change tool kit, etc. is located in the stowage compartment. Cup holder in the centre console Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. To open: open stowage compartment = (Y page 263). X To remove the insert: slide catches : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in stowage compartment =. X Slide catches : outwards in the direction of the arrow until they engage. X Features You can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Reducer ; can be removed. In this way, you can place large and small containers in the cup holder. X To remove: grip reducer ; and pull out upwards in the direction of the arrow. X To insert: place reducer ; into the cup holder and push it downwards against the direction of the arrow to the stop. 267 Sun visors Overview Bottle holders : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining strip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Stowing and features Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section (Y page 262). Ashtray To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 263). X To remove the insert: slide catches : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Lift bottle holder insert ; up and remove. X To refit the insert: place insert ; in the stowage compartment. X Slide catches : outwards in the direction of the arrow until they engage. The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. X To open: open stowage compartment : (Y page 263). X To remove the insert: pull insert ; up in the direction of the arrow, out of the cup holder. X To refit the insert: push insert ; on the lefthand side into the cup holder. X i Only refit insert ; on the left-hand side of the cup holder. Z Features 268 Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Rthe Stowing and features Ra Socket in the front-passenger footwell X Lift up the cover of socket :. Socket in the boot Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X To open: open stowage compartment : under the armrest (Y page 262). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. 12 V sockets General notes Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as mobile phone chargers. X X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also Features i You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 320). More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with COMAND Online can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Ron the Internet at https://www.mercedesbenz.com/de/mercedes-me/ konnektivitaet/ i The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Using a mobile phone If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, the mobile phone will be charged and connected with the exterior aerial. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 262). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the preinstalled fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 205). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the hands-free system. Active calls will first be transferred to the mobile phone directly. General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with COMAND Online through the Bluetooth® interface. This also applies if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. Z Stowing and features cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. 269 270 Features Stowing and features When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available: Rat a qualified specialist workshop Rvia the HomeLink® Hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 or alternatively +49 (0) 6838 907-277 Ron the Internet at http://www.homelink.com Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 270). Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? of the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : begins to light up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow immediately the first time button ;, = or ? is programmed. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : lights up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm. X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronise the rolling code (Y page 271). X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Features Synchronising the rolling code Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 270). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronise the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this, you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be placed at different locations depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarise yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within range of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronisation is then complete. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener, please note the following: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 5and 20 cm or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Z Stowing and features Several attempts may be required. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. 271 Features 272 Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. X Frequencies Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) DE (Germany) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 7519301 29 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ES (Spain) 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Stowing and features Europe Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AD (Andorra) 20 July 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 AT (Austria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FI (Finland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FR (France) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 (UK) MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BE (Belgium) BG (Bulgaria) CH (Switzerland) CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CZ (Czech Republic) General Licence GL-30/R/ 2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433 DK (Denmark) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HU (Hungary) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) IC (Canary Islands) 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3rd June 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NL (Netherlands) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 RO (Romania) Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 RU (Russian Federation) POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 May 05 MHz: 433 LT (Lithuania) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LU (Luxembourg) SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15347 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15348 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15350 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15358 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/ 15359 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LI (Liechtenstein) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 150405/9538 24 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Z Stowing and features MC (Monaco) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MT (Malta) IE (Ireland) 273 274 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) SK (Slovakia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MQ (Martinique) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390 Stowing and features UK (United Kingdom) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Africa Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Asia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AE (United Arab Emirates) 1623/5/10-2/26/76 MHz: 433 JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 KW (Kuwait) RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 5 October 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 SA (Saudi Arabia) 11_02_05/5024-5-6 MHz: 418, 433 ZA (South Africa) 11 October 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433 SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 July 07 MHz: 433 America Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) BB (Barbados) Registration not required MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 MHz: 40, 433 3943/DFRS05165/F-50 MHz: 280 to 433 GF (French Guyana) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GP (Guadeloupe) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Australia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AU (Australia) 28 June 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 NZ (New Zea- 20 March 06 land) MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper- Features 275 Stowing and features ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 276 Engine compartment Engine compartment Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked. Maintenance and care jewellery and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. Rkeep Bonnet G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch Rremove off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 85 mm. The active bonnet is triggered by pyrotechnics. For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Engine compartment Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet :. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled struts. Closing the bonnet Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Engine oil Notes on oil level Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this Z Maintenance and care With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. X 277 Engine compartment 278 when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Maintenance and care Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Topping up engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X X been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. Engine compartment 279 Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open the cap slowly to release the pressure. Example: engine oil filler cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 278). For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 324). X X Checking the coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 132). X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 132) in the ignition lock. X Slowly turn cap ; half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap ; further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank :. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank :. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Further information on coolant (Y page 325). X Z Maintenance and care Checking and adding other service products Example ASSYST PLUS 280 Topping up the windscreen washer system Overview of the engine compartment G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Maintenance and care G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. Example engine : Oil dipstick ; Brake fluid reservoir = Engine oil cap ? Coolant expansion tank A Washer fluid reservoir ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Example To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. The recommended minimum washer fluid level is 1 litre. If the washer fluid level drops below 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 242). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 326). X X does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 277). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify RService Care Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X Information about service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Care Notes on care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. Rdry, Z Maintenance and care a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. 281 282 Care You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended Maintenance and care period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash ! It is preferable to use car washes with adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that corresponds to the specification for the Cabriolet programme. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle. ! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a key with KEYLESS-GO is within the detection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna, the following situations could lead to the unintentional opening of the boot lid: Rusing a car wash Rusing a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 2 m away from the vehicle. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Other transmission positions may lead to damage to the vehicle. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the roof are completely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0 The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe wax off the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. Care High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. Rsoft top (Designo vario-roof) Relectrical components Rbattery Rplug connectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damage to seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. ! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a key with KEYLESS-GO is within the detection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna, the following situations could lead to the unintentional opening of the boot lid: Rusing a car wash Rusing a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 2 m away from the vehicle. ! Mille Miglia special model: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: Rvigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These Z Maintenance and care Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. X 283 284 Care products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt paintwork leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by Maintenance and care hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaning agents, solvents or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of the windows/ windscreen. Do not touch the inside of the windows/windscreen with hard items such as an ice scraper or a ring. Otherwise, the windows/windscreen could be damaged. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph- Care 285 ite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. X Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a high-pressure cleaner. Cleaning the mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Cleaning the exhaust pipe G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow Z Maintenance and care ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths 286 Care these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- Maintenance and care based cleaning agents, such as sanitary cleanser or wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by MercedesBenz. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing the vehicle. Where will I find...? Where will I find...? 287 First-aid kit Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle X X Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Fire extinguisher G WARNING When you brake heavily or change direction suddenly, the fire extinguisher can be thrown around the vehicle interior if the roller box is left open. There is a risk of injury. Keep the shutter of the roller box closed whilst the vehicle is in motion. Fold legs = out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. Fire extinguisher ; is in the roller box behind the centre console, between the seats. X To remove: open cover :. X Slide locking button ? in the direction of the arrow. Z Breakdown assistance Warning triangle : is located in a bracket on the inside of the boot lid. X Open the boot lid. X Press catches ; in the direction of the bracket and open the bracket in the direction of the arrow. X Pull the retaining clip of warning triangle : in the centre of the bracket, outwards. X Remove warning triangle : from the bracket. First-aid kit : is located in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Swing the boot floor upwards (Y page 266). X Remove first-aid kit :. Where will I find...? 288 Lift and swing out bracket = from the side on which locking button ? is located. X Take fire extinguisher ; out of the roller box. X To insert: insert fire extinguisher ; into the roller box. X Insert bracket = into the roller box on the side opposite locking button ?. X Then, insert bracket = completely. X Slide locking button ? in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Check whether bracket = is properly engaged. X Close cover :. X To remove towing eye :, lift the stowage tray at recess A. X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 290). X i The tyre inflation compressor weighs approximately 1.2 kg. The tyre inflation compressor is maintenancefree. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre-change tool kit The tyre-change tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 266). Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Breakdown assistance Vehicle tool kit General notes The towing eye is located in the boot in a bracket below the boot lid lock. If the vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit, it is located in the stowage well under the floor of the boot. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit The TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 266). : Bag containing the tyre-changing tools Bag : containing the tyre-changing tools contains: Rjack Rwheel wrench Rcentring pin Rwheel chock Rgloves Depending on the vehicle equipment, not all vehicles will have the tools that are required for changing a wheel, such as a jack or wheel wrench. Tools approved for your vehicle are available at a qualified specialist workshop. i The jack weighs approximately 2.3 kg. : ; = ? A Towing eye Tyre sealant filler bottle Fuse allocation chart Tyre inflation compressor Stowage tray recess The maximum load bearing capacity of the jack can be found on the adhesive label on the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtyres with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tyres) (Y page 289) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 288) Ran emergency spare wheel (certain countries only) (Y page 318) Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and fitting a wheel (Y page 312). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance (Y page 287). Observe legal requirements. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 237) in the display mes- Rcheck the tyre for damage driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/ manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. When replacing one or all tyres, observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tyres: Rsize Rtype and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure Rif Z Breakdown assistance Flat tyre 289 290 Flat tyre that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes Breakdown assistance G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Flat tyre 291 Using the TIREFIT kit Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto the valve. X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press on and off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after five minutes: (Y page 292). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes: (Y page 291). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clear water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. X Tyre pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Z Breakdown assistance Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor (Y page 288). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Flat tyre 292 Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filler hose. Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of five minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). Breakdown assistance X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X X Pull away immediately. Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. Battery (vehicle) Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about ABS (Y page 62) and ESP® (Y page 67). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing Rby friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. Z Breakdown assistance To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. X When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X 293 294 Battery (vehicle) G WARNING Risk of explosion Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Breakdown assistance H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, please observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Rswitch the ignition off. Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal, followed by the positive terminal. The transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. After the work has been completed, firmly reinstall the battery and the cover of the positive terminal. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The Battery (vehicle) vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. 295 battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. X Open the bonnet. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 296). Breakdown assistance G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed in the vehicle. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump-start connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the Z 296 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Breakdown assistance G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off . All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 132). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Press cover : of positive terminal ; down (in the direction of the arrow) and turn it clockwise. To expose positive terminal ;, press cover : down further. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, always beginning with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. Z 297 Breakdown assistance Jump-starting Towing away and tow-starting 298 Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X After the jump lead is removed, return cover : of positive terminal ; to the original position. Positive terminal ; is covered up and thus insulated again. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. X i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing away and tow-starting Important safety notes Breakdown assistance G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rcar/trailer Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 321). ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function are activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. Towing away and tow-starting 299 For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed away. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N. Deactivate the automatic locking feature before towing the vehicle (Y page 211). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehicle is towed away (Y page 75). Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. There is a risk of burning when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use extreme caution when removing the rear cover. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 288). X Front bumper: insert a finger into the recess on the bottom edge of cover :. X Pull cover : out of the bumper towards you in the direction of the arrow. Cover : is attached by a strap in the aperture. X Rear bumper: press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover : from the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it. Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Front bumper: position cover : on the opening in the bumper. X To close, press the lower section of cover :. X Rear bumper: position cover : with the tab on the opening in the bumper. X To close, press the lower section of cover : until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X X Z Breakdown assistance ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its 300 Towing away and tow-starting Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground Breakdown assistance G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 115). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 132). X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 298). Towing the vehicle away with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The car/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even overturn. Transporting the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transportation. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Electrical fuses ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 296). Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the boot floor (Y page 288). If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Before replacing a fuse Switch off the engine. Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 132). or X When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 132). X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RDashboard fuse box RFuse box in the rear compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel X X Dashboard fuse box i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 301). ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw- driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Open the driver's door. To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X X Z Breakdown assistance Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) 301 Electrical fuses 302 Fuse box in the engine compartment X Close the bonnet. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 301). G WARNING Breakdown assistance When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. Fuse box in the rear i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 301). The fuse box in the rear is located on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. Open the bonnet. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold cover : of the fuse box up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. To open: open the seat belt guide on the right-hand seat and remove the seat belt (Y page 103). X Move the right-hand seat as far forward as possible (Y page 104). X Insert your fingers at the bottom of front cover ; between the cover and floor covering. X Remove front cover ; by pulling it forward in the direction of the arrow. X Lift off top cover : by pulling it in the direction of the arrow. To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert both openings = at the rear of cover : into the brackets on the fuse box. The brackets on the fuse box must be completely visible in both openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. Fuses = are accessible through the two openings in the top of the fuse box. X X X X X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. Electrical fuses 303 To close: insert the securing tags underneath top cover : in the recesses at the top of the fuse box. X Fold down top cover : until it engages audibly. X Insert the securing tags underneath top cover ; in the recesses at the front of the fuse box. X Push front cover ; towards the rear until it engages audibly. X Move the right-hand seat backwards (Y page 104). X Hook the seat belt into the seat belt guide on the right-hand seat (Y page 103). Breakdown assistance X Z 304 Operation Rdesignation Further information regarding wheels and tyres can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 317). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Information on tyre pressures can be found: Rin the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 152) Rin the "Tyre pressure" section Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. Rtype i Further information on wheels and tyres can Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype Wheels and tyres G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure not to squash the tyre sidewalls. If you cannot avoid driving over obstacles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Operation Check wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tyres after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on the tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 305). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 307). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 318). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style Rtyre pressure Rmileage Notes on the tyre tread G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 289). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly Z Wheels and tyres Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. 305 306 Winter operation reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 318). Wheels and tyres MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with an activated tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 289). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 312). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both are marked with M+S. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the maximum design speed of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum design speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 172). Tyre pressure Snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever Rfit fit snow chains on the front wheels snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 317). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Ron vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC), you must drive at a raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 175). When pulling away with snow chains fitted, you can deactivate ESP® (Y page 67). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased driving force (cutting action). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 318). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. Z Wheels and tyres When you have fitted the M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 307). X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 309). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 311). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 318). X 307 308 Tyre pressure RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Wheels and tyres Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 152). Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 318). Additionally, the tyre pressure table may also state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the vehicle speed and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rcause increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 309). Tyre pressure The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 307). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou drive with a heavy load. Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 307). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Z Wheels and tyres Important safety notes 309 310 Tyre pressure Example: current tyre pressure display For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 310). Wheels and tyres Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 307). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 311). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 307). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 237). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tyre pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tyre pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the X Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tyre pressure warning lamp then lights up: RIf the Rectify tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low. The tyre pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre has dropped significantly. The tyres must be checked. RIf the Warning tyre defect message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre has dropped suddenly. The tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 237). If the position of the wheels are interchanged on the vehicle, the tyre pressures may be displayed in the wrong positions for a short time. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed in the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 307). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new ref‐ erence values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number Argentina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Z Wheels and tyres tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. 311 312 Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Abu Dhabi TRA, Registered NO ER0092100/12 Dubai TRA, Registered NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer NO: DA0047074/10 Wheels and tyres Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 Mhz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philippines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 289). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 289). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure mon- itor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 313). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tyres are fitted corresponding to the direction of rotation. Changing a wheel An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. 313 Securing the vehicle against rolling away Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle i Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tyrechange tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example: Rjack Rwheel chock Rwheel wrench If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 288). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to safeguard the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Insert the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Wheels and tyres Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Unload the vehicle. The jack can only be used when the vehicle is unladen. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 132). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. X X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Z 314 Changing a wheel Wheels and tyres must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Ronly use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not permissible to use it to perform maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, safeguard it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be fitted. To remove: take socket ; and wheel wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 288). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Position wheel wrench = on socket ;. X Using wheel wrench =, turn hub cap : anticlockwise and remove it. X To fit: before fitting, check hub cap : and the wheel area for dirt and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach wheel wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 25 Nm. X i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 25 Nm. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the hub cap fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. X Using wheel wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Changing a wheel The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. X 315 Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits completely on jacking point A. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground. X Turn crank C until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Removing a wheel and fitting a wheel, the wheel rim may strike the ceramic brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The X threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ? upwards. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X X Position jack B at jacking point A. Z Wheels and tyres ! Mercedes AMG vehicles: when removing 316 Changing a wheel Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING Wheels and tyres If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 312). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Mercedes AMG vehicles: when removing and fitting a wheel, the wheel rim may strike the ceramic brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Y page 319). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The rim could otherwise be damaged. X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Wheel and tyre combinations Wheel and tyre combinations You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 307). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size across an axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 289). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tyres Stow the jack and the rest of the tyre-change tool kit in the boot again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 307). Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. X 317 318 Emergency spare wheel Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. not switch off ESP®. the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo Wheels and tyres RHave Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after fitting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the position where the emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Removing the emergency spare wheel Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel located under the boot floor The collapsible emergency spare wheel is located in the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 266). When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You should also regularly check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 307). The value on the wheel is valid. An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with collapsible emergency spare wheel :. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 313). Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel in an emergency spare wheel bag The emergency spare wheel is enclosed in emergency spare wheel bag : and secured in the boot. Emergency spare wheel Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. X Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (Y page 313). The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor (Y page 288). Pull plug ? and the filler hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the filler hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press button of pressure release valve ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the filler hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. X Stow plug ? and the filler hose in the lower section of the compressor housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. X Z Wheels and tyres Open the boot separator (Y page 95). Loosen tensioning strap ; on both sides of emergency spare wheel bag :. X Unhook retaining spring hooks = of tensioning strap ; from the retainers. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 313). X X 319 320 Vehicle electronics Information on technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Technical data G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the vehicle electronics, e.g.: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type Rthe This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 268). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: Approved aerial positions : Rear wing i On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) Identification plates Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X Open the right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate : Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) ; EU type approval number (only for certain countries) = VIN ? Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) A Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) B Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) C Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Z Technical data transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: 321 Service products and capacities 322 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Fold up floor covering : in front of the frontpassenger seat. VIN ; can be seen. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 321). Service products and capacities Important safety notes Technical data G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Service products include the following: Rfuels Rlubricants Rcoolant Rbrake (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations. Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 You can obtain further information at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel Service products and capacities RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Model Total capacity Mercedes-AMG vehicles 75.0 l All other models 65.0 l or 75.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel Mercedes-AMG vehicles Approx. 14.0 l Models with 65.0 l total capacity Approx. 8.0 l Models with 75.0 l total capacity Approx. 9.0 l Petrol Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON, which conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) Rpetrol with additives containing metal Rdiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON. RE100 i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 152). Z Technical data vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: 323 324 Service products and capacities SL 400 Additives in petrol ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with ! Operating the engine with fuel additives at least 98 ROZ, if you want maximum performance from the engine. Alternatively, you can also use unleaded petrol of at least 95 ROZ. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 ROZ. Doing so results in higher fuel consumption and significantly reduced performance. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with Technical data at least 98 ROZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by MercedesBenz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Engine oil General notes ! As a temporary measure, if the recommen- ded fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! As a temporary measure, if the recommen- ded fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol in emergencies with an octane rating of 91 RON. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If no fuel other than petrol with 91 RON or a lower grade is available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 322). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recom- Service products and capacities Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval All models 229.5 Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: RPetrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 This may only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model Replacement amount SL 400 6.5 l SL 500 8.0 l Mercedes‑AMG SL 63 Mercedes‑AMG SL 65 Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 322). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. Z Technical data mends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB-Freigabe" or "MBApproval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. In certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. 325 326 Service products and capacities ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. Technical data i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 322). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen washer system Important safety notes G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 322). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. X i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data Vehicle data Mercedes-AMG vehicles General notes Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Dimensions and weights 2099 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors Vehicle height 1300 mm 1308 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1679 mm 1691 mm Wheelbase 2584 mm Maximum boot load 100 kg All other models Vehicle length 4631 mm Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof 4787 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2099 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1877 mm Wheelbase 2585 mm Maximum boot load 100 kg SL 400 Model : Opening height Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1920 mm 1934 mm All other models 1922 mm 1923 mm Vehicle height 1314 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1695 mm SL 500 Vehicle height 1315 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1696 mm Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Vehicle length 4640 mm Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof Z Technical data Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 321). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. 327 328